WO2015122454A1 - Cover glass, display device having cover glass, and method for producing cover glass - Google Patents

Cover glass, display device having cover glass, and method for producing cover glass Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2015122454A1
WO2015122454A1 PCT/JP2015/053814 JP2015053814W WO2015122454A1 WO 2015122454 A1 WO2015122454 A1 WO 2015122454A1 JP 2015053814 W JP2015053814 W JP 2015053814W WO 2015122454 A1 WO2015122454 A1 WO 2015122454A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
hole
unit base
base material
cover glass
reinforcing portion
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2015/053814
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
諭 江森
中澤　伸介
章悦 内田
敬 竹腰
Original Assignee
大日本印刷株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2014024782A external-priority patent/JP6260322B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2014069994A external-priority patent/JP6331127B2/en
Application filed by 大日本印刷株式会社 filed Critical 大日本印刷株式会社
Publication of WO2015122454A1 publication Critical patent/WO2015122454A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00—Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01—Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03—Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041—Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333—Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/133308—Support structures for LCD panels, e.g. frames or bezels
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G02—OPTICS
    • G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333—Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/133308—Support structures for LCD panels, e.g. frames or bezels
    • G02F1/133331—Cover glasses
    • G—PHYSICS
    • G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F2203/00—Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/00 - G06F3/048
    • G06F2203/041—Indexing scheme relating to G06F3/041 - G06F3/045
    • G06F2203/04103—Manufacturing, i.e. details related to manufacturing processes specially suited for touch sensitive devices

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a cover glass provided on a display device.
  • the present invention also relates to a display device provided with a cover glass.
  • the present invention also relates to a method for manufacturing a cover glass.
  • a cover glass for protecting the display surface of a display device on the viewer side of a display device such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL display.
  • the cover glass also serves to protect the display device and a touch panel sensor provided on the viewer side of the display device. Note that a cover glass and a touch panel sensor are integrally formed.
  • Patent Document 1 proposes that a cover glass is configured using a tempered glass having a compressive stress layer on which a compressive stress is generated.
  • Patent Document 1 a cover glass having a size corresponding to the size of each display device is manufactured by dividing a large tempered glass into individual pieces. By the way, the compressive stress layer of tempered glass is formed on the glass surface by chemical treatment or heat treatment. Therefore, when a large tempered glass is divided as in Patent Document 1, a tensile stress layer in which a tensile stress is generated is exposed on the side surface of the obtained cover glass. For this reason, it is considered that a cover glass having sufficient strength on the side surface cannot be manufactured by the method described in Patent Document 1.
  • Patent Document 2 proposes that the outer peripheral surface of the cover glass including the side surface of the cover glass is bordered by a plastic film.
  • a plastic film As the edging method, an injection molding method, a dispensing method, a spray coating method, a roller coating method, and the like have been proposed.
  • the material of the plastic film include an epoxy resin or an acrylic resin.
  • the resin material constituting the plastic film is exposed to the external environment such as the atmosphere.
  • the resin material is provided in a predetermined place, usually, first, the resin material adjusted to have a predetermined fluidity is applied on the object, and then a polymerization reaction of the resin material is caused. A step of curing or solidifying the resin material is performed. Therefore, the plastic film provided on the outer peripheral surface of the cover glass is formed based on a polymerization reaction that has proceeded in an environment exposed to an external environment such as the atmosphere.
  • acrylic resins generally have high reactivity. For this reason, when a plastic film is formed using an acrylic resin, the polymerization reaction is inhibited by oxygen, and as a result, the polymerization reaction cannot sufficiently proceed, and it is considered that sufficient hardness of the plastic film cannot be obtained. .
  • the plastic film provided on the outer peripheral surface of the cover glass is required to have a sufficiently high hardness so that the cover glass can be protected from impact.
  • the hardness of the plastic film is too high, the plastic film becomes brittle, and as a result, the toughness of the plastic film decreases.
  • the epoxy resin generally has a high hardness, for example, a hardness of around D90. For this reason, it is considered that it is inappropriate to use an epoxy-based resin in the application of a cover glass to which an impact can be frequently applied.
  • D90 means that the hardness value obtained by measuring with a type D durometer is 90.
  • the first aspect of the present invention has been made in consideration of such points, and an object thereof is to provide a cover glass having a reinforcing portion made of an appropriate resin material and a display device with the cover glass. .
  • a through hole may be formed in a portion of the cover glass that overlaps the speaker or the in-camera.
  • the formation of the through hole means that the impact resistance of the cover glass is lowered around the through hole. The reduction in impact resistance becomes more remarkable when the tensile stress layer of tempered glass is exposed on the wall surface of the through hole.
  • many methods for reinforcing the side surface of the cover glass have been proposed.
  • a method for reinforcing the wall surface of the through hole has not been studied much.
  • the second aspect of the present invention has been made in consideration of such points, and an object thereof is to provide a cover glass and a display device with a cover glass in which the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material is reinforced.
  • 1st this invention is the cover glass provided in a display apparatus, Comprising: The 1st surface, the 2nd surface on the opposite side to the said 1st surface, and the side surface extended between the said 1st surface and the said 2nd surface A unit base material made of glass, and a reinforcing part provided on a side surface of the unit base material and including a resin material, wherein the resin material of the reinforcing part includes a polyene containing an ene compound and a thiol compound.
  • the reinforcing portion may be provided on a side surface constituting the outer shape of the unit base material and may include a side reinforcing portion including the resin material.
  • the unit base material is formed with a through hole penetrating the first surface and the second surface, and the reinforcing portion is the through hole of the unit base material. You may have the hole reinforcement part provided on the top and containing the said resin material.
  • a decorative portion exhibiting a predetermined color may be provided at least partially on the surface of the reinforcing portion.
  • the polyene-polythiol resin of the resin material of the reinforcing portion may contain 20 to 80% by weight of an ene compound and 20 to 80% by weight of a thiol compound. .
  • 2nd this invention is the cover glass provided in a display apparatus, Comprising: The 1st surface and the 2nd surface on the opposite side to the said 1st surface are penetrated, The said 1st surface and the said 2nd surface are penetrated.
  • a cover glass comprising: a unit base material made of glass in which a through hole is formed; and a hole reinforcing portion that is provided on a wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material and includes a resin material.
  • the hole reinforcing portion includes a first surface extending laterally from an end portion of the first surface of the unit base material, and an end portion of the second surface of the unit base material.
  • a second surface extending laterally from the surface, and a side surface extending between the first surface and the second surface of the hole reinforcing portion, the first surface of the unit base material and the hole reinforcing portion
  • the step between the first surface and the first surface of the unit base material may be 10 ⁇ m or less, and the step between the second surface of the unit base material and the second surface of the hole reinforcing portion may be 10 ⁇ m or less.
  • the unit base material includes at least the compressive stress layer formed on the first surface and the second surface, the compressive stress layer on the first surface side, and the second surface. And a tensile stress layer positioned between the compression stress layer on the side.
  • the tensile stress layer may be exposed on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material.
  • the hole reinforcing portion is formed such that the tensile stress layer exposed on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material is covered with the hole reinforcing portion.
  • a minimum value of a covering dimension of the hole reinforcing portion provided on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material may be 20 ⁇ m or more.
  • the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material intersects the first surface of the unit base material, and as it goes toward the second surface side of the unit base material.
  • the first wall surface extending to the center side of the through hole intersects the second surface of the unit base material, extends toward the center side of the through hole toward the first surface side of the unit base material, and the first And a second wall surface that merges with the one wall surface.
  • the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base member spreads toward the center side of the through hole from the second surface side of the unit base member toward the first surface side. It may be.
  • a decorating portion exhibiting a predetermined color is provided on the first surface side of the unit base material, and the hole reinforcing portion has the same color as the decorating portion. It may be configured to exhibit. Moreover, the said decoration part may be comprised so that it may overlap with the said reinforcement part for holes, when it sees along the normal line direction of the said cover glass.
  • the hole reinforcing portion may be configured to exhibit a predetermined color.
  • At least a part of the touch panel sensor unit may be provided on the first surface side of the unit base material.
  • the resin material of the hole reinforcing portion may include a polyene-polythiol resin.
  • At least one of the side surface of the hole reinforcing portion that intersects the first surface of the hole reinforcing portion or the portion that intersects the second surface is a round surface or a corner.
  • the surface may be processed.
  • the present invention is a display device with a cover glass, comprising a display device and a cover glass disposed on the display device, wherein the cover glass is made of the cover glass described above.
  • the present invention is a method for manufacturing a cover glass provided with a through-hole provided in a display device, which includes a first surface, and a second surface opposite to the first surface, and the first surface and the A step of preparing a unit base material made of glass in which a through-hole penetrating the second surface is formed; an application step of applying a coating liquid containing a resin material to the wall surface of the through-hole of the unit base material; Curing the coating liquid on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material, and forming a hole reinforcing portion on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material. is there.
  • the unit base material includes at least the compressive stress layer formed on the first surface and the second surface, the compressive stress layer on the first surface side, and the second surface. And a tensile stress layer positioned between the compression stress layer on the side.
  • the tensile stress layer may be exposed on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material.
  • the hole reinforcing portion is formed such that the tensile stress layer exposed on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material is covered with the hole reinforcing portion.
  • the through hole of the unit base material may be sealed on the second surface side of the unit base material.
  • the coating liquid is applied from the first surface side of the unit base material in a sealed space.
  • the hole reinforcing portion is formed so as to close the through hole of the unit base material.
  • the manufacturing method of the said cover glass is further equipped with the resin material processing process of forming a through-hole in the said reinforcement part for holes after the said hardening process.
  • a first protective film having a hole communicating with the through hole of the unit base material is provided on the first surface of the unit base material.
  • the wall surface of the hole of the first protective film may be positioned closer to the center of the through hole of the unit base material than the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material.
  • the preparatory step of the method for manufacturing a cover glass according to the present invention includes a protective film forming step of providing the first protective film on which the holes are formed on the first surface of the unit base material, and the first protective film. And an etching step of forming the through-hole by wet-etching the unit base material as a resist.
  • a second protective film having a hole formed at a position corresponding to the hole of the first protective film is further provided on the second surface of the unit base material, and the etching is performed.
  • the unit base material is wet-etched from the first surface side and the second surface side using the first protective film and the second protective film as a resist, and in the coating step, the unit base material
  • the through hole may be sealed with a sealing member disposed on the second protective film.
  • a second protective film or a sealing member that seals the through hole of the unit base material is provided on the second surface of the unit base material, and in the etching step, The unit base material may be wet-etched from the first surface side using the first protective film as a resist.
  • the method for manufacturing a cover glass according to the present invention further includes an element part forming step of forming at least a part of an element part including at least one of a decoration part and a touch panel sensor part on the first surface side of the unit base material. You may have.
  • the element part forming step may be performed prior to the protective film forming step.
  • FIG. 1 is a developed view showing a display device with a cover glass in the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a plan view showing a touch panel sensor unit provided on the cover glass of FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the cover glass of FIG. 2 along the line III.
  • 4 is a cross-sectional view of the cover glass of FIG. 2 taken along line IV.
  • FIG. 5 is an enlarged cross-sectional view illustrating a side surface of the cover glass of FIG. 3.
  • FIG. 6A is a diagram showing a part of a step of forming a unit laminate having a unit substrate and a protective film using a substrate made of large tempered glass.
  • FIGS. 1 is a developed view showing a display device with a cover glass in the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a plan view showing a touch panel sensor unit provided on the cover glass of FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the cover glass of FIG. 2
  • FIGS. 6B (a) and 6 (b) are diagrams showing a part of a step of forming a unit laminate body having a unit base material and a protective film using a base material made of large tempered glass.
  • FIG. 6C is a diagram showing a part of a step of forming a unit laminate having a unit base material and a protective film using a base material made of large tempered glass.
  • FIGS. 6D (a) and 6 (b) are diagrams showing a part of a step of forming a unit laminate body having a unit base material and a protective film using a base material made of large tempered glass.
  • FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating a part of a process for obtaining a cover glass whose side surface is reinforced by providing a resin on a side surface of a unit base material of the unit laminate body.
  • FIG. 7B is a diagram illustrating a part of a process for obtaining a cover glass whose side surface is reinforced by providing a resin on a side surface of a unit base material of the unit laminate body.
  • FIG. 7C is a diagram showing a part of a process for obtaining a cover glass whose side surface is reinforced by providing a resin on the side surface of the unit base material of the unit laminate body.
  • FIG. 7D is a diagram showing a part of a process for obtaining a cover glass whose side surface is reinforced by providing a resin on the side surface of the unit base material of the unit laminate body.
  • FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a first modification of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a second modification of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a third modification of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a fourth modification of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a fifth modification of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a sixth modification of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a reinforcing portion is formed on a wall surface of a through hole formed in a unit base material.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a step of forming the reinforcing portion 26 on the wall surface a of the through hole shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 19A is a diagram showing a part of a step of forming a unit laminate having a unit substrate and a protective film using a substrate made of large tempered glass.
  • FIG. 19B is a diagram showing a part of a step of forming a unit laminate including a unit base material and a protective film using a base material made of large tempered glass.
  • FIGS. 19C (a) and 19 (b) are diagrams showing a part of a process of forming a unit laminate having a unit substrate and a protective film using a substrate made of large tempered glass.
  • FIG. 19D (a), (b), and (c) are diagrams showing a part of a step of forming a unit laminate having a unit substrate and a protective film using a substrate made of large tempered glass.
  • FIG. 20A is a diagram showing a part of a step of reinforcing a through hole of a cover glass.
  • FIG. 20B is a diagram showing a part of the step of reinforcing the through hole of the cover glass.
  • FIG. 20C is a diagram showing a part of the step of reinforcing the through hole of the cover glass.
  • FIG. 20D is a diagram showing a part of the step of reinforcing the through hole of the cover glass.
  • FIG. 21A is a cross-sectional view showing a first protective film in a first modification of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 21B is a cross-sectional view showing a unit laminate body obtained by etching the base material using the second protective film as a resist in the first modification example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 22A is a diagram illustrating a process of applying a coating liquid in a space surrounded by a second protective film and a through hole of a unit base material in the first modification example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 22B is a diagram showing a step of forming a through hole in the hole reinforcing portion in the first modification of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 22C is a cross-sectional view showing the cover glass in the first modification example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 23A is a cross-sectional view showing a unit base material according to a second modification of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 23B is a cross-sectional view showing a unit laminate body in a second modification example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 24A is a diagram showing a step of applying a coating liquid in a space surrounded by the second protective film and the through hole of the unit base material in the second modification example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 24B is a cross-sectional view showing the cover glass in the second modification example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 25A is a cross-sectional view showing a unit laminate body according to a third modification of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 25B is a diagram illustrating a process of applying the coating liquid in a space surrounded by the second protective film and the through hole of the unit base material in the third modification example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 25C is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a third modification of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a fourth modification of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a fifth modification of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a cover glass in a sixth modified example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view showing another example of the cover glass in the sixth modified example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example of a coating liquid applied to the wall surface of the through hole of the cover glass in the seventh modification example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating another example of the coating liquid applied to the wall surface of the through hole of the cover glass in the seventh modification example of the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 32 is a plan view showing an example of a cover glass provided with a touch panel sensor unit in an eighth modification of the second embodiment. 33 is a cross-sectional view of the cover glass of FIG. 32 taken along line XXXIII. 34 is a cross-sectional view of the cover glass of FIG. 32 taken along line XXXIV.
  • FIGS. 36A to 36D are diagrams showing a method for evaluating the printability of a resin in Example 2.
  • FIGS. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a method for evaluating the impact resistance of a resin in Example 3.
  • FIGS. 1 to 7D a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7D.
  • the scale, the vertical / horizontal dimension ratio, and the like are appropriately changed and exaggerated from those of the actual ones.
  • the display device 10 with a cover glass is configured by combining a display device 15 and a cover glass 20.
  • the illustrated display device 15 is configured as a flat panel display.
  • the display device 15 includes a display panel 16 having a display surface 16 a and a display control unit (not shown) connected to the display panel 16.
  • the display panel 16 includes an active area A1 that can display an image, and an inactive area (also referred to as a frame area) A2 that is disposed outside the active area A1 so as to surround the active area A1.
  • the display control unit processes information regarding the video to be displayed, and drives the display panel 16 based on the video information.
  • the display panel 16 displays a predetermined image on the display surface 16a based on a control signal from the display control unit. That is, the display device 15 plays a role as an output device that outputs information such as characters and drawings as video.
  • the cover glass 20 is disposed on the display surface 16 a of the display panel 16 on the viewer side of the display device 15.
  • the cover glass 20 is bonded to the display surface 16a of the display device 15 via an adhesive layer (not shown).
  • the surface (first surface) on the display device side of the cover glass 20 is represented by reference numeral 20a
  • the surface (second surface) on the observer side is represented by reference numeral 20b.
  • the cover glass 20 is configured to provide not only a function of protecting the display device 15 but also a touch panel function. Specifically, on the first surface 20a of the cover glass 20 on the display device 15 side, a touch panel sensor unit 40 including a sensor electrode for detecting the approach or contact of the external conductor is provided. Moreover, the 1st decorating part 60 for exhibiting a desired color is further provided in the inactive area Aa2 of the 1st surface 20a of the cover glass 20. As shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 2 is a plan view showing the cover glass 20 as viewed from the first surface 20a side.
  • the first decorating unit 60 is omitted for convenience of explanation.
  • the first surface 20a of the cover glass 20 corresponds to the active area Aa1 corresponding to the active area A1 and the inactive area A2 of the display panel 16, and the active area Aa1 corresponding to the area where the touch position can be detected. It is partitioned into an inactive area Aa2 located around the area Aa1.
  • the touch panel sensor unit 40 is connected to the plurality of sensor electrodes 41 and 42 disposed in the active area Aa1 and the corresponding sensor electrodes 41 and 42, and is disposed in the inactive area Aa2 of the cover glass 20.
  • the lead-out wiring 43 and a plurality of terminal portions 44 connected to the corresponding lead-out wiring 43 are provided.
  • the sensor electrodes 41 and 42 include a plurality of first sensor electrodes 41 extending along the first direction D1, and a plurality of second electrodes extending along a second direction D2 orthogonal to the first direction D1.
  • Sensor electrode 42 Each of the sensor electrodes 41 and 42 may include line portions 41a and 42a extending linearly and bulging portions 41b and 42b bulging from the line portions 41a and 42a.
  • the lead-out wiring 43 is provided in the inactive area Aa2 in order to transmit the signals detected by the corresponding sensor electrodes 41 and 42 to the terminal portion 44.
  • the signal transmitted to the terminal unit 44 by the extraction wiring 43 is transmitted to the detection control unit via a flexible substrate (not shown) attached to the terminal unit 44.
  • the layer configuration of the components arranged in the active area Aa1 of the cover glass 20 will be described.
  • the first line portion 41 a, the first bulge portion 41 b, and the second bulge portion 42 b of the touch panel sensor unit 40 may be formed on the same plane.
  • the first line portion 41a, the first bulging portion 41b, and the second bulging portion 42b are simultaneously formed by patterning the transparent conductive layer 51 made of a transparent conductive material such as indium tin oxide (ITO). It is possible.
  • the first line portion 41a and the second line portion 42a are formed so as to partially overlap each other when viewed from the normal direction of the cover glass 20, and between the first line portion 41a and the second line portion 42a. Insulating layer 47 is interposed.
  • the layer configuration of the components arranged in the inactive area Aa2 of the cover glass 20 will be described.
  • the first decorative portion 60 is arranged in the inactive area Aa ⁇ b> 2 so as to be positioned closer to the observer side than the above-described extraction wiring 43.
  • the 1st decoration part 60 is visually recognized through the cover glass 20 from the observer side. That is, in the display device 10 with the cover glass, the appearance of the inactive area Aa2 is determined by the first decorating unit 60 and its surrounding components.
  • the color of the 1st decorating part 60 is selected according to the design property calculated
  • the material which comprises the 1st decorating part 60 is determined according to the selected color, for example, when white is calculated
  • the binder for example, a resin such as an acrylic resin, an epoxy resin, a polyurethane resin, a polyamide resin, or a mixture of these resins can be used as appropriate.
  • the first decorative portion 60 cannot spread to the side surface 20 c of the cover glass 20, that is, to the side surface 26 c of the reinforcing portion 26. For this reason, the design effect by the first decorative portion 60 does not reach the side surface 20 c of the cover glass 20, for example, the reinforcing portion 26. In consideration of this point, as shown in FIG. 3 and FIG.
  • the unit base 22 is located on the first surface 22 a side or the first surface 26 a side of the reinforcing portion 26 and outside the first decorating portion 60.
  • the 2nd decoration part 62 may be provided.
  • the 2nd decoration part 62 is comprised so that a predetermined color may be exhibited.
  • the range of the non-active area Aa2 that can exhibit a desired color is expanded to the outside, and design improvements such as prevention of light leakage from the outer peripheral portion are improved.
  • the 2nd decoration part 62 is comprised so that it may overlap with the reinforcement part 26, when it sees along the normal line direction of the 1st surface 20a of the cover glass 20.
  • the 2nd decoration part 62 is comprised so that it may reach even to the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20, when it sees along the normal line direction of the 1st surface 20a of the cover glass 20.
  • the color which the 2nd decoration part 62 exhibits is not specifically limited, According to the effect on the design requested
  • the 2nd decoration part 62 may be comprised with the material same as the 1st decoration part 60 so that the 1st decoration part 60 may exhibit the same color, or is different from the 1st decoration part 60. It may be configured to exhibit a color.
  • a method of providing the second decorating part 62 various known methods can be adopted. For example, after the reinforcing part 26 is formed, a coating liquid containing a material constituting the second decorating part 62 is screen-printed. A method of coating the first surface 26a of the reinforcing portion 26 by a printing method such as a method is employed.
  • examples of the solvent for constituting the coating liquid include ethers, ketones, esters, alcohols, polyhydric alcohols, aromatic hydrocarbons, and the like. Further, the surface tension of the coating solution is adjusted within a range of 20 to 40 mN / m, for example.
  • the cover glass 20 includes a unit base material 22 and a reinforcing portion 26.
  • the unit base member 22 includes a first surface 22a on the display device side, a second surface 22b opposite to the first surface 22a, and a side surface 22c extending between the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b. Yes.
  • the reinforcing portion 26 is provided on the side surface 22 c of the unit base material 22.
  • the unit base material 22 is obtained by dividing the base material 30 made of large tempered glass into individual pieces. As shown in FIG. 5, the unit base material 22 includes a compressive stress layer 24a formed on the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b, a compressive stress layer 24a on the first surface 22a side, and a second surface 22b side. And a tensile stress layer 24b located between the compressive stress layer 24a.
  • the compressive stress layer 24a is a layer in which compressive stress is generated
  • the tensile stress layer 24b is a layer in which tensile stress is generated.
  • physical strengthening wind cooling strengthening
  • chemical strengthening are known as a method for generating the compressive stress layer 24a and the tensile stress layer 24b.
  • a chemical treatment is performed in which alkali ions contained in glass are exchanged with other alkali ions having a larger ionic radius at a temperature below the strain point.
  • compressive stress can be generated near the surface layer where the ions are exchanged.
  • some kind of impact is applied to the first surface 22a or the second surface 22b, and thereby a scratch such as a crack is formed on the first surface 22a or the second surface 22b. Even can prevent the wound from expanding. For this reason, the 1st surface 22a and the 2nd surface 22b of the unit base material 22 have the high tolerance with respect to an impact.
  • aluminosilicate glass can be used as a material constituting the unit base member 22.
  • the thickness of the compressive stress layer 24a is generally in the range of 10 to 100 ⁇ m.
  • the tensile stress layer 24 b of the unit base material 22 reaches the side surface 22 c of the unit base material 22. That is, the tensile stress layer 24 b is exposed on the side surface 22 c of the unit base material 22. For this reason, the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 is weak against damage such as cracks, compared to the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base material 22.
  • the reinforcing portion 26 described above is provided to protect the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 as described above.
  • the reinforcing portion 26 for example, a curable resin that is cured by a polymerization reaction by heating or ultraviolet irradiation is used.
  • the reinforcing part 26 has a desired fluidity at the time of molding before curing, and the reinforcing part 26 has a desired hardness and strength after curing. This makes it possible to achieve both formability, hardness and strength.
  • the reinforcement part 26 is exposed at least partially with respect to external environments, such as air
  • the polymerization reaction when the reinforcing portion 26 is cured proceeds in an environment where the reinforcing portion 26 is exposed to the external environment such as the atmosphere.
  • a resin material having a high reactivity such as an acrylic resin
  • the polymerization reaction is inhibited by oxygen, and as a result, the polymerization reaction cannot proceed sufficiently, and therefore the reinforcing portion having sufficient hardness. 26 cannot be obtained.
  • the reinforcing portion 26 becomes brittle, and as a result, defects or the like frequently appear in the reinforcing portion 26. That is, it is considered that the toughness of the reinforcing portion 26 is lowered.
  • the second decorative portion 62 may be a screen printing method or the like. It is formed by a printing method or the like.
  • the reinforcement part 26 is predetermined wettability with respect to the material which comprises the 2nd decoration part 62, ie, printability. It is required to have.
  • a polyene-polythiol-based resin is used as the resin material contained in the reinforcing portion 26 as supported by the examples described later.
  • the polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resin refers to a polyene-polythiol-based resin configured so that a polymerization reaction proceeds due to light irradiation.
  • the characteristics of the polyene-polythiol photocurable resin will be described.
  • the polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resin contains an ene compound, a thiol compound, and a photopolymerization initiator.
  • a polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resin has an advantage that it is not subjected to polymerization inhibition due to oxygen as compared with an acrylic photocurable resin.
  • the polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resin can protect the unit base material 22 from an impact and has an appropriate hardness so as not to become brittle.
  • a polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resin that has undergone an appropriate polymerization reaction has a hardness in the range of D50 to D75.
  • “appropriately undergoing a polymerization reaction” means that the polymerization reaction was carried out under the conditions recommended by the material manufacturer providing the resin material. Note that the above-mentioned characteristics regarding hardness are not limited to polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resins in which a polymerization reaction proceeds due to light irradiation, but apply to polyene-polythiol-based resins in general including ene compounds and thiol compounds. It is a feature.
  • the feature of not being subjected to polymerization inhibition due to oxygen as compared with acrylic photo-curable resin is not limited to the case where polyene-polythiol resin is cured by light irradiation, such as electron beam irradiation and heating. This is also the case when the polyene-polythiol resin is cured due to other factors. That is, the polyene-polythiol-based resin may be configured as a polyene-polythiol-based electron beam curable resin or a polyene-polythiol-based thermosetting resin.
  • the polythiol-based thermosetting resin contains, for example, an ene compound, a thiol compound, and a thermal polymerization initiator such as ⁇ , ⁇ ′ azobisisobutylnitrile (AIBN).
  • a thermal polymerization initiator such as ⁇ , ⁇ ′ azobisisobutylnitrile (AIBN).
  • the composition ratio of the ene compound and the thiol compound in the polyene-polythiol-based resin such as polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resin is appropriately determined according to the required characteristics.
  • the polythiol-based resin has 20 to 80% by weight of ene compound and 20 to 80% by weight of thiol compound.
  • the sum of the weight% of the ene compound and the weight% of the thiol compound may be 100.
  • polyene-polythiol-based resins such as polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resins also have an advantage of less curing shrinkage than acrylic resins such as acrylic-based photocurable resins.
  • cover glass 20 according to the present embodiment and curing shrinkage will be described.
  • the reinforcing portion 26 is formed by curing the coating liquid 27. For this reason, if a large shrinkage occurs when the coating liquid 27 is cured, the accuracy of the size of the reinforcing portion 26 is lowered. Moreover, when large shrinkage arises, the adhesiveness between the reinforcement part 26 and the unit base material 22 will also fall.
  • the resin material constituting the reinforcing portion 26 is preferably a material that is as small as possible when shrinking when cured.
  • the unit when the thickness of the base material 22 is 700 ⁇ m, a step generated between the surfaces 26 a and 26 b of the reinforcing portion 26 and the surfaces 22 a and 22 b of the unit base material 22 can be suppressed within a range of 1 to 10 ⁇ m, for example.
  • the thickness of the compressive stress layer 24a is generally in the range of 10 to 100 ⁇ m. Therefore, selecting a material having a small shrinkage when cured and thereby suppressing the step between the unit base member 22 and the reinforcing portion 26 within a range of 1 to 10 ⁇ m respectively, the degree of shrinkage is that of the compressive stress layer 24a. It leads to become smaller than thickness. For this reason, even if the reinforcing portion 26 contracts during curing, it is possible to prevent the tensile stress layer 24b from being exposed on the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 or a wall surface 23c of a through hole 23 described later.
  • composition of a polyene-polythiol resin such as a polyene-polythiol photocurable resin will be described in detail.
  • An ene compound is a polyfunctional compound having two or more carbon-carbon double bonds in one molecule.
  • the order becomes vinyl ethers, vinyl esters, allyl ethers, allyl isocyanuric acid derivatives, acrylic acid derivatives, and styrenes.
  • the thiol compound is a compound having two or more thiol groups in one molecule, and examples thereof include esters of mercaptocarboxylic acid and a polyhydric alcohol, aliphatic polythiols and aromatic polythiols, and other polythiols. These 1 type (s) or 2 or more types can be used.
  • Examples of the mercaptocarboxylic acid in the ester of mercaptocarboxylic acid and polyhydric alcohol include thioglycolic acid, ⁇ -mercaptopropionic acid and ⁇ -mercaptopropionic acid.
  • the blend ratio of the ene compound (a) and the thiol compound (b) is such that the ratio of the number of unsaturated bonds of the ene compound (a) to the number of thiol groups of the thiol compound (b) is 2: 1 to 1: 2.
  • a range is preferable. When the amount of thiol groups exceeds 1: 2, a large amount of unreacted thiol groups remain in the composition after the curing reaction. It is not preferable from the viewpoint that there are few advantages such as high adhesion and no polymerization inhibition due to oxygen.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited, and a known photopolymerization initiator can be used.
  • a photopolymerization initiator in the case of a resin system having a radical polymerizable unsaturated group, it is commercially available as acetophenones (for example, trade name Irgacure 184 (manufactured by Ciba Specialty Chemicals) 1 -Hydroxy-cyclohexyl-phenyl-ketone), benzophenones, thioxanthones, propiophenones, benzyls, acylphosphine oxides, benzoin, benzoin methyl ether and the like can be used alone or in combination.
  • acetophenones for example, trade name Irgacure 184 (manufactured by Ciba Specialty Chemicals) 1 -Hydroxy-cyclohexyl-phenyl-ketone
  • benzophenones 1, thi
  • the photopolymerization initiator (c) is preferably added in a proportion of 0.001 to 10% by mass with respect to the total amount of the ene compound (a) and the thiol compound (b). If it is less than 0.001% by mass, there may be a problem that the photopolymerization reaction cannot be sufficiently caused. Moreover, even if it adds exceeding 10 mass%, the improvement of an effect is not seen.
  • FIG. 5 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 of FIG.
  • the reinforcing portion 26 includes a first surface 26 a that extends from the vicinity of the end 22 ae of the first surface 22 a on the same plane as the first surface 22 a of the unit substrate 22, and the unit substrate 22.
  • the second surface 22b extends from the vicinity of the end 22be of the second surface 22b to the side on the same plane as the second surface 22b and between the first surface 26a and the second surface 26b of the reinforcing portion 26.
  • Side surface 26c an advantage provided by the reinforcing portion 26 including the first surface 26a and the second surface 26b will be described.
  • Patent Document 2 When providing a reinforcing portion that reinforces the side surface of the base material by trimming the outer peripheral surface of the base material as in Patent Document 2, a step is formed between the surface of the reinforcing portion and the surface of the base material. . Therefore, light is likely to be scattered at the boundary between the reinforcing portion and the base material, and the light transmittance and reflectance are likely to change greatly. As a result, the boundary between the reinforcing portion and the base material is easily visually recognized by the observer. That is, it is conceivable that the design properties of the cover glass deteriorate. Moreover, when the reinforcement part of a cover glass is exposed outside, the operation feeling of a touch panel will be inhibited by the level
  • the first surface 22a of the unit base member 22 and the first surface 26a of the reinforcing portion 26 are located on the same plane.
  • the 2nd surface 22b of the unit base material 22 and the 2nd surface 26b of the reinforcement part 26 are located on the same plane. That is, there is no or almost no step between the unit base member 22 and the reinforcing portion 26.
  • the steps between the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 and the first surface 26a and the second surface 26b of the reinforcing portion 26 are each 10 ⁇ m or less. For this reason, it can suppress that the boundary between the unit base material 22 and the reinforcement part 26 is visually recognized by an observer.
  • the thickness of the compressive stress layer 24a is generally in the range of 10 to 100 ⁇ m. Therefore, when the step between the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 and the first surface 26a and the second surface 26b of the reinforcing portion 26 is 10 ⁇ m or less, that is, the step is the compressive stress layer 24a.
  • the compressive stress layer 24a of the unit base material 22 and the reinforcing portion 26 overlap at least partially on the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22. Therefore, the tensile stress layer 24 b exposed on the side surface 22 c of the unit base material 22 can be covered with the reinforcing portion 26 without a gap. For this reason, the impact resistance of the cover glass 20 can be increased more reliably.
  • the first surface 26a and the second surface 26b of the reinforcing portion 26 are respectively on the same plane as the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 from the end 22ae and the end 22be over at least 300 ⁇ m. It extends toward. Thereby, the intensity
  • “on the same plane” extends from the end 22ae and the end 22be to the side over at least 300 ⁇ m of the first surface 26a and the second surface 26b of the reinforcing portion 26, as in the case of the above-described step. This means that the distance in the thickness direction of the unit base material 22 between the portion and the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base material 22 is 10 ⁇ m or less.
  • the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 will be described.
  • the end portion of the first surface 26a of the reinforcing portion 26 is represented by reference numeral 26ae
  • the end portion of the second surface 26b of the reinforcing portion 26 is represented by reference numeral 26be.
  • the side surface 26 c is configured as a flat surface that extends substantially flat between the end portion 26 ae and the end portion 26 be.
  • the first surface 26a and the side surface 26c intersect at a substantially right angle, and similarly, the second surface 26b and the side surface 26c intersect at a substantially right angle. That is, in the present embodiment, the position of the end portion 26ae and the position of the end portion 26be in the left-right direction in FIG. 5 (the direction in which the first surface 26a and the second surface 26b extend) match.
  • the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 includes a first side surface 22d and a second side surface 22e.
  • the first side surface 22d intersects the end 22ae of the first surface 22a of the unit base material 22, and spreads outward as it goes to the second surface 22b side of the unit base material 22.
  • the second side surface 22e intersects the end 22be of the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22, expands outward toward the first surface 22a side of the unit base member 22, and joins the first side surface 22d. Yes.
  • merging part of 22 d of 1st side surfaces and the 2nd side surface 22e will protrude outside.
  • the reinforcing portion 26 sandwiches the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22, the reinforcing portion 26 can be firmly adhered to the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22.
  • the substrate 30 is formed by wet etching from both sides.
  • the dimensions of the cover glass 20 will be described.
  • the covering dimension is the length of the reinforcing portion 26 in the direction along the normal direction of the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26.
  • the normal direction of the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 is parallel to the left-right direction in FIG.
  • the minimum value of the covering dimension of the reinforcing portion 26 is represented by the symbol Tmin.
  • the first side surface 22d of the unit base member 22 spreads outward toward the second surface 22b side.
  • the 2nd side 22e of the unit base material 22 has spread outside as it goes to the 1st surface 22a side.
  • the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 is a flat surface that intersects the first surface 26a and the second surface 26b at a right angle. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 5, at the position where the first side surface 22d and the second side surface 22e merge, the covering dimension of the reinforcing portion 26 becomes the minimum value Tmin.
  • the minimum value Tmin of the covering dimension of the reinforcing portion 26 is appropriately set so that the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 can be protected even when an impact is applied to the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 or the like. Yes.
  • the minimum value Tmin of the covering dimension of the reinforcing portion 26 is set to 20 ⁇ m or more.
  • the covering dimension of the reinforcing portion 26 is the maximum value at the position of the first surface 26a or the position of the second surface 26b.
  • the maximum value of the covering dimension of the reinforcing portion 26 becomes too large, it is considered that the reinforcing portion 26 is easily peeled off from the unit base material 22 when an impact is applied to the cover glass 20.
  • the ratio of the glass in the cover glass 20 reduces and the ratio of resin increases, it is also considered that the intensity
  • the maximum value of the coating size of the reinforcing portion 26 is set to 250 ⁇ m or less in the thinnest portion (the portion represented by the symbol Tmin in FIG. 5), and the thickest portion (see FIG. 5). In the portion represented by the symbol Tmax), it is preferably set to 500 ⁇ m or less.
  • the covering dimension Tmin of the reinforcing part 26 in the thinnest part is set to 100 ⁇ m, and the covering dimension Tmax of the reinforcing part 26 in the thickest part is set to 300 ⁇ m. Conceivable.
  • the thickness of the cover glass 20 (that is, the thickness of the unit base material 22 and the thickness of the reinforcing portion 26) is appropriately set according to the required strength, the area of the cover glass 20, and the like. It is within range.
  • FIGS. 6A to 6E (a) and 6 (b) a process of forming a unit laminate 35 having a unit substrate 22 and protective films 81 and 82 using a substrate 30 made of large tempered glass.
  • 6A, 6B (a), FIG. 6C, FIG. 6D (a), and FIG. 6E (a) are cross-sectional views showing the substrate 30 in this step.
  • FIG. 6E (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the unit laminate body 35 shown in FIG. 6E (a).
  • 6B (b) and 6D (b) are plan views showing the base material 30 in this step.
  • a base material 30 made of large tempered glass is prepared.
  • the base material 30 includes a first surface 30a, a second surface 30b on the opposite side of the first surface 30a, and a side surface 30c extending between the first surface 30a and the second surface 30b.
  • a compressive stress layer 24a is formed on the first surface 30a, the second surface 30b, and the side surface 30c of the base material 30, and a tensile stress layer 24b exists inside the compressive stress layer 24a. is doing.
  • the entire surface of the base material 30 is formed by the compressive stress layer 24a.
  • the 1st decorating part 60 and the touchscreen sensor part 40 are formed in a predetermined some division (element part formation) Process).
  • the first surface 30a of the base material 30 is divided into two rows in the vertical direction of the paper surface and divided into three columns in the horizontal direction of the paper surface.
  • the decoration part 60 and the touch panel sensor part 40 are formed.
  • the number of sections of the base material 30 is not particularly limited.
  • a method of forming the first decorating unit 60 and the touch panel sensor unit 40 on the first surface 30a side a known method is appropriately used, and for example, a photolithography method is used.
  • the touch panel sensor unit 40 and the first decoration unit 60 may be collectively referred to as an element unit 70.
  • a protective film forming step of providing the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 in a predetermined plurality of sections on the first surface 30a and the second surface 30b of the base material 30 is performed.
  • a first protective film 81 is provided on the first surface 30a of the substrate 30 to continuously cover the element portions 70 respectively provided in the plurality of sections.
  • a second protective film 82 is provided on the second surface 30 b of the substrate 30.
  • the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 are provided so as to cover the entire area of the first surface 30a and the second surface 30b of the substrate 30, respectively.
  • the protective films 81 and 82 function as a resist that protects the element portion 70 when the substrate 30 is divided by wet etching, which will be described later, using hydrofluoric acid or the like.
  • the material which comprises the protective films 81 and 82 is not specifically limited.
  • biaxially stretched polypropylene or unstretched polypropylene having a thickness of about 50 to 100 ⁇ m can be used as a material for forming the protective films 81 and 82.
  • the protective film 81, 82 is configured.
  • the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 provided over the entire area of the first surface 30a and the second surface 30b are replaced with the first surface 30a and the second protective film 82, respectively.
  • the specific method for dividing the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 is not particularly limited, and various methods can be adopted.
  • unnecessary portions (portions that become gaps) of the first protective film 81 may be removed using a mold having a shape corresponding to the shape of the first protective film 81 shown in FIG. 6D (b).
  • unnecessary portions (portions that become gaps) of the second protective film 82 can be removed.
  • unnecessary portions of the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 may be removed using laser processing.
  • a cutting step of cutting the base material 30 along the gap between the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 provided in each section of the base material 30 is performed.
  • the base material 30 is wet-etched from the first surface 30a side and the second surface 30b side of the base material 30 by using the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 as resists, thereby removing the base material 30.
  • Disconnect As the etching solution, hydrofluoric acid or the like is used as described above. As a result, as shown in FIG.
  • the unit base 22 made of glass, the element part 70 provided on the first surface 22a side of the unit base 22, and the first surface 22a of the unit base 22
  • the unit laminated body 35 having the first protective film 81 provided on the element portion 70 and the second protective film 82 provided on the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 can be obtained.
  • FIG. 6E (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the unit laminate body 35 shown in FIG. 6E (a).
  • the first protective film 81 is configured to protrude laterally from the first surface 22a of the unit base member 22.
  • the second protective film 82 is configured to protrude from the second surface 22 b of the unit base member 22 to the side.
  • Such a relationship between the unit base material 22 and the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 is based on the fact that the first surface 22a of the unit base material 22 and the first surface 22a of the unit base material 22 and This is realized by continuing the etching process for a time that allows the unit base material 22 to be penetrated by etching from both of the two surfaces 22b.
  • etching proceeds isotropically in both the depth direction and the horizontal direction at a position in the vicinity of the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 in general. For this reason, as shown in FIG.
  • FIGS. 7A to 7D a process for obtaining a cover glass 20 whose side surfaces are reinforced by providing reinforcing portions (resin etc.) on the side surfaces 22c of the unit base material 22 of the unit laminate body 35 will be described. explain.
  • an application step of applying an application liquid 27 containing a curable material such as an ultraviolet curable resin or a thermosetting resin onto the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 is performed.
  • a curable material such as an ultraviolet curable resin or a thermosetting resin
  • the coating liquid containing acrylic resin and a photoinitiator is used in the coating process.
  • the coating liquid 27 is filled in a space surrounded by the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22, the first protective film 81, and the second protective film 82, as shown in FIG. 7A.
  • the coating liquid 27 may be applied to the extent that it overflows also onto the end surface 81c of the first protective film 81 and the end surface 82c of the second protective film 82.
  • the coating liquid 27 overflowing on the end surface 81c of the first protective film 81 and the end surface 82c of the second protective film 82 is scraped off using a squeegee or the like.
  • the surface of the coating liquid 27 coincides with the end surface 81 c of the first protective film 81 and the end surface 82 c of the second protective film 82. That is, the position of the end of the liquid surface of the coating liquid 27 on the first protective film 81 side coincides with the position of the end surface 81c of the first protective film 81, and the liquid surface of the coating liquid 27 on the second protective film 82 side.
  • the position of the end portion coincides with the position of the end surface 82 c of the second protective film 82.
  • a curing step of curing the coating liquid 27 provided on the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 is performed.
  • the coating liquid 27 is cured by irradiating the coating liquid 27 with light such as ultraviolet rays.
  • the reinforcing part 26 is formed on the side surface 22 c of the unit base material 22.
  • the first protective film 81 on the first surface 22a of the unit substrate 22 and the second protective film 82 on the second surface 22b of the unit substrate 22 are removed.
  • a cover glass 20 including the unit base material 22 and the reinforcing portion 26 provided on the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 can be obtained.
  • the second decorative portion 62 is placed at a position on the first surface 22 a side of the unit base member 22 or the first surface 26 a side of the reinforcing portion 26 and outside the first decorative portion 60. It may be provided.
  • the 2nd decorating part 62 is comprised so that the 1st decorating part 60 and the same color may be exhibited, for example.
  • the range of the non-active area Aa2 that can exhibit a desired color is expanded to the outside, and design improvements such as prevention of light leakage from the outer peripheral portion are improved.
  • the 2nd decorating part 62 is comprised so that it may overlap with the reinforcement part 26, when it sees along the normal line direction of the 1st surface 20a of the cover glass 20.
  • the reinforcing portion 26 made of a curable resin is provided on the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22. For this reason, when an impact is applied to the side surface 20 c of the cover glass 20, the force transmitted to the side surface 22 c of the unit base material 22 is alleviated by the reinforcing portion 26, and damage such as cracks occurs on the side surface 22 c of the unit base material 22. This can be suppressed. Thereby, even if the compressive stress layer is not formed on the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22, the impact resistance of the cover glass 20 can be sufficiently increased.
  • the exposed tensile stress layer 24b can be covered with the reinforcing portion 26, so that the impact resistance of the cover glass 20 is increased. Sex can be made high enough.
  • the resin material constituting the reinforcing portion 26 includes a polyene-polythiol resin. For this reason, even if it is a case where the reinforcement part 26 is exposed with respect to external environments, such as air
  • the wettability of the surface of the reinforcing portion 26 can be appropriately ensured.
  • the coating liquid applied on the first surface 26a of the reinforcing part 26 after the reinforcing part 26 is formed, for example, the coating liquid for the second decorating part 62 remains stably on the first surface 26a.
  • the printability of the first surface 26a of the reinforcing portion 26 can be sufficiently ensured. This makes it possible to uniformly form components such as the second decorative portion 62 on the first surface 26 a of the reinforcing portion 26.
  • the reinforcement part 26 is laterally protruded from the 1st protective film 81 and the 2nd surface 22b of the unit base material 22 which protruded from the 1st surface 22a of the unit base material 22 as mentioned above. It is formed in a space positioned by the protruding second protective film 82. For this reason, as shown to FIG. 7C and FIG. 7D, the 1st surface 22a of the unit base material 22 and the 1st surface 26a of the reinforcement part 26 are located on the same plane. Similarly, the 2nd surface 22b of the unit base material 22 and the 2nd surface 26b of 26 are located on the same plane.
  • the reinforcement part 26 of this Embodiment ensuring of the intensity
  • the coating liquid 27 overflowing on the end surface 81c of the first protective film 81 and the end surface 82c of the second protective film 82 is used using a squeegee or the like.
  • the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 is leveled.
  • the position of the end part 26ae of the first surface 26a coincides with the position of the end face 81c of the first protective film 81.
  • the position of the end portion 26be of the second surface 26b of the reinforcing portion 26 matches the position of the end surface 82c of the second protective film 82.
  • the position of the end portion 26ae of the first surface 26a and the position of the end portion 26be of the second surface 26b of the reinforcing portion 26 are set to the positions of the end surfaces 81c and 82c of the protective films 81 and 82.
  • the reinforcing portion 26 is formed based on the coating liquid 27 having a predetermined fluidity. Therefore, if the coating liquid 27 is applied without using a frame such as the protective films 81 and 82, it is difficult to precisely control the dimensions such as the thickness and shape of the coating liquid 27.
  • the positions of the end faces 81c and 82c of the protective films 81 and 82 are determined with high accuracy by processing using a mold or a laser as described above. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to realize the accuracy according to the accuracy in the processing using a mold or a laser as the accuracy of the dimensions such as the thickness and shape of the coating liquid 27. For this reason, according to this Embodiment, the position of edge part 26ae, 26be of the reinforcement part 26, ie, the position of the edge part of the cover glass 20, can be defined with a sufficient precision. Thereby, when the cover glass 20, the display device 15, and the case are assembled, the ease of the process and the yield can be increased.
  • the process precision of the 1st decorating part 60 with respect to the display apparatus 15 and the touchscreen sensor part 40 is also improved. be able to. Thereby, the high designability and operativity of the display apparatus 10 with a cover glass are realizable.
  • the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 is configured as a flat surface that extends substantially flat between the end portion 26ae and the end portion 26be, not only the position of the end portions 26ae and 26be of the reinforcing portion 26 but also the reinforcing portion.
  • the position of the entire side surface 26c of the 26 is also determined according to the positions of the end surfaces 81c and 82c of the protective films 81 and 82. That is, the processing accuracy of the entire side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 as well as the end portion of the cover glass 20 can be increased.
  • the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 is comprised by the reinforcement part 26 which consists of resin, compared with the case where the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 is comprised with glass, it is a cover.
  • the edge portion of the side surface 20c of the glass 20 does not need to be subjected to laceration prevention processing such as chamfering.
  • the reinforcement part 26 of the cover glass 20 may be comprised so that the 1st decoration part 60 provided in the 1st surface 20a side of the cover glass 20 and the 2nd decoration part 62 may be exhibited.
  • the reinforcing portion 26 may include a color pigment having the same color as the color pigment included in the first decorative portion 60 and the second decorative portion 62.
  • the area around the outer edge of the non-active area Aa2 is visually recognized as an area having the same color as the areas of the first decorative portion 60 and the second decorative portion 62 located on the inner side. For this reason, the effect on the design similar to the case where the 1st decorating part 60 and the 2nd decorating part 62 are extended to the outer edge of inactive area Aa2 can be acquired.
  • the 1st decoration part 60 and the 2nd decoration part 62 are formed by apply
  • the reinforcement part 26 is colored as described above, the first decorative part 60 and the second decorative part 62 are not provided in the region around the outer edge of the inactive area Aa2, and thus the inactive area Aa2 is provided.
  • a region around the outer edge of the image is visually recognized with a desired color. For this reason, the process of providing the 1st decorating part 60 and the 2nd decorating part 62 can be made easier.
  • the “same color” means that the chromaticities of the two colors are close enough that the difference in color cannot be discerned with the naked eye. More specifically, “same color” means that the color difference ⁇ E * ab between the two colors is 10 or less, preferably 3 or less. The “different color” means that the color difference ⁇ E * ab between the two colors is larger than 10.
  • the color difference ⁇ E * ab is a value calculated based on L * , a * and b * in the L * a * b * color system, and is an index relating to a color difference when observed with the naked eye. Is the value.
  • the element part forming step of forming the element part 70 such as the first decoration part 60 and the touch panel sensor part 40 on the first surface 30 a of the base material 30 is performed on the base material 30.
  • the example implemented prior to the protective film formation process which provides the protective film 81 and the 2nd protective film 82 was shown.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and a step of providing the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 on the base material 30 in a state where the element portion 70 is not provided, and then cutting the base material 30 and You may implement the process of providing the reinforcement part 26 on the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22.
  • FIG. As a result, as shown in FIG. 8, it is possible to obtain the cover glass 20 including the unit base material 22 and the reinforcing portion 26 provided on the side surface 22 c of the unit base material 22.
  • the reinforcing portion 26 may be configured to exhibit a predetermined color.
  • the reinforcing part 26 may include a color pigment exhibiting a predetermined color.
  • the cover glass 20 may further include a decorating portion provided on the first surface 26 a of the reinforcing portion 26 after the reinforcing portion 26 is formed.
  • the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 are provided for the base material 30 in a state where neither the first decoration unit 60 nor the touch panel sensor unit 40 is provided.
  • An example is shown.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 with respect to the base material 30 in a state where the touch panel sensor unit 40 is not provided but the first decoration unit 60 is provided.
  • the step of cutting the base material 30 and the step of providing the reinforcing portion 26 on the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 may be performed. Accordingly, as shown in FIG.
  • the unit base material 22, the first decorating part 60 provided on the first surface 22 a of the unit base material 22, and the side surface 22 c of the unit base material 22 are provided.
  • the cover glass 20 provided with the reinforcement part 26 can be obtained.
  • the cover glass 20 may further include a second decorating part 62 provided at a position outside the first decorating part 60 after the reinforcing part 26 is formed.
  • the shape of the side surface 26c that is, the shape of the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 may be adjusted by processing the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26. Since the reinforcement part 26 is comprised with the resin material as mentioned above, compared with the case where the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 is comprised with the tempered glass, the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 is processed, and a desired shape is formed. It is easier to get. In addition, strength reduction and microcracks are less likely to occur due to processing. As a processing method, for example, processing using a polishing machine can be employed.
  • the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 may be processed so that both the end portion 26ae on the first surface 26a side and the end portion 26be on the second surface 26b side of the reinforcing portion 26 are scraped off. .
  • both the portion that intersects the first surface 26 a and the portion that intersects the second surface 26 b of the side surface 26 c of the reinforcing portion 26 are processed into round surfaces. Even in this case, if even a part that is not processed (unprocessed part 26d) remains on the side surface 22c, the outer shape of the cover glass 20 is increased based on the above-described coating method using the protective films 81 and 82.
  • FIG. 10 shows an example in which the side surface 26c is processed so that the side surface 26c becomes a round surface.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and although not illustrated, the side surface 26c becomes a square surface. 26c may be processed.
  • the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 may be processed.
  • the reinforcing portion 26 is formed by applying the coating liquid 27 in the space surrounded by the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22, the first protective film 81, and the second protective film 82.
  • An example is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the resin material constituting the reinforcing part contains a polyene-polythiol-based resin so that it is sufficiently polymerized.
  • a reinforced part having a desired hardness and toughness after the reaction can be obtained.
  • the printability of the reinforcing part can be sufficiently ensured.
  • FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the cover glass 20 provided with the reinforcing portion 26 formed by the dipping method.
  • the side surface 22c intersects the end portion 22ae of the first surface 22a of the unit base member 22, and the first side surface 22d that spreads outward toward the second surface 22b side of the unit base member 22. And the second surface 22e that intersects with the end 22be of the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 and expands outward as it goes to the first surface 22a side of the unit base member 22 is shown.
  • the shape of the side surface 22c is not particularly limited as long as the reinforcing portion 26 can be provided.
  • the side surface 22c may extend so as to be orthogonal to the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b.
  • the side surface 22c having such a shape can be formed, for example, by cutting the substrate 30 using a laser. Further, by forming a scribe line on the surface of the base material 30 using a cutter or a laser, and then applying a striking force or a bending stress to the base material 30, the base material 30 is cut from the scribe line as a starting point.
  • the side surface 22c shown in FIG. 12 may be formed.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 13, the compressive stress layer 24 a may be formed not only on the first surface 22 a and the second surface 22 b of the unit base member 22 but also on the side surface 22 c. Even in this case, the force transmitted to the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 when the impact is applied to the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 is reduced by providing the reinforcing portion 26 on the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22. can do.
  • the method for forming the reinforcing portion 26 on the side surface 22c is not particularly limited, and the methods described in the present embodiment and the modified examples are appropriately adopted.
  • the reinforcing portion provided on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 is denoted by reference numeral 28 for distinction from the reinforcing portion provided on the side surface 22c constituting the outer shape of the unit base member 22. Has been.
  • FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view showing a step of forming the reinforcing portion 28 on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 15 shows a state in which the reinforcing portion 26 is formed not only on the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 but also on the side surface 22 c constituting the outer shape of the unit base material 22.
  • the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 are provided so as to protrude inward from the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22.
  • the coating liquid 27 in the space surrounded by the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22, the first protective film 81, and the second protective film 82, as shown in FIG.
  • the reinforcing portion 28 can be formed on the wall surface 25c with dimensional accuracy.
  • the reinforcing portion 28 provided on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 includes a polyene-polythiol resin. For this reason, it is possible to provide the reinforcing portion 28 having a desired hardness that has undergone a sufficient polymerization reaction on the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25. Further, the printability of the reinforcing portion 28 can be sufficiently ensured.
  • the reinforcing portion 26 and the coating solution 27 include a curable resin that cures by heating or ultraviolet irradiation and is cured by the polymerization reaction.
  • the present invention is not limited thereto. There is nothing. When it is applied onto the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22, it has a predetermined fluidity. However, as long as it can be cured thereafter, the first embodiment and each modified example, or a second type which will be described later.
  • various fluids can be used as the coating liquid 27 for forming the reinforcing portion 26.
  • a fluid made of a resin material melted by heat may be used as the coating liquid 27.
  • curing is a concept including not only a phenomenon in which the resin material is cured by heating or ultraviolet irradiation, but also a phenomenon in which the resin material is cured by being cooled and solidified.
  • the resin material may be cooled and solidified by natural cooling, or the resin material may be cooled and solidified by forced cooling.
  • Solidification means that the substance changes from a gas or liquid state to a solid state.
  • the side surface of the unit base material 22 provided with the reinforcing portion is the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 formed in the unit base material 22.
  • An example is shown.
  • the reinforcing portion 28 is provided on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 will be described in more detail.
  • the reinforcing portion 28 provided on the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 is also referred to as a hole reinforcing portion 28.
  • the reinforcing portion provided on the side surface 22 c constituting the outer shape of the unit base material 22 is also referred to as a side surface reinforcing portion 26.
  • the same parts as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
  • FIG. 16 is a plan view showing cover glass 20 in the present embodiment.
  • the cover glass 20 includes a unit base material 22 having a rectangular shape having four corners in a plan view, a side surface reinforcing portion 26 provided on the side surface 22 c of the unit base material 22, and It has.
  • the side reinforcing portion 26 is arbitrarily provided to protect the side surface 22 c of the unit base material 22.
  • the side reinforcing portion 26 is provided so as to surround the side surface 22 c of the unit base material 22 in a plan view. Since the shape of the side reinforcing portion 26 and the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 is the same as in the case of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof is omitted.
  • FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view taken along line XXVII of the cover glass 20 shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 18 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the through hole 23 of the cover glass 20 of FIG.
  • the hole reinforcing portion 28 is provided on the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 formed in the unit base material 22.
  • the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 refers to a hole penetrating the unit base material 22 in a state where the hole reinforcing portion 28 is not provided. It means that.
  • the “through hole 23 of the cover glass 20” means that the wall surface 23 c penetrates the cover glass 20, which is constituted by the hole reinforcing portion 28 provided on the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22. It means a hole to be made.
  • the through hole after the hole reinforcing portion 28 and the coating liquid 27 described later are provided with reference numeral 23. 25 is omitted.
  • the tensile stress layer 24 b of the unit base material 22 reaches the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22. That is, the tensile stress layer 24 b is exposed on the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22. For this reason, the wall surface 25c of the through-hole 25 of the unit base material 22 is weak against damages such as cracks as compared with the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base material 22.
  • the hole reinforcing portion 28 described above is provided to protect the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 as described above.
  • the material constituting the hole reinforcing portion 28 for example, a curable resin that is cured by heating or ultraviolet irradiation is used.
  • the hole reinforcing portion 28 has desired fluidity at the time of molding before curing, and the hole reinforcing portion 28 has desired hardness and strength after curing. This makes it possible to achieve both formability, hardness and strength.
  • the material constituting the hole reinforcing portion 28 may contain a polyene-polythiol resin.
  • the hole reinforcing portion 28 includes a first surface 28 a extending laterally from an end portion 22 af of the first surface 22 a of the unit base material 22, and an end portion 22 bf of the second surface 22 b of the unit base material 22. And a side surface 28c extending between the first surface 28a and the second surface 28b.
  • the first surface 28 a of the hole reinforcing portion 28 is located on the same plane as the first surface 22 a of the unit base member 22.
  • the second surface 28 b of the hole reinforcing portion 28 is located on the same plane as the second surface 22 b of the unit base member 22.
  • the steps between the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 and the first surface 28a and the second surface 28b of the hole reinforcing portion 28 are each 10 ⁇ m or less. For this reason, the same advantage as the case of the reinforcement part 26 in 1st Embodiment can be acquired. For example, ensuring the strength of the through-hole 23 of the cover glass 20 and ensuring the design of the cover glass 20 can both be achieved.
  • the side surface 28c of the hole reinforcing portion 28 will be described.
  • the inner end portion of the first surface 28 a of the hole reinforcing portion 28 is represented by reference numeral 28 ae
  • the inner end portion of the second surface 28 b of the hole reinforcing portion 28 is represented by reference numeral 28 be. Yes.
  • the first surface 28a and the second surface 28b of the hole reinforcing portion 28 are the same as the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 until reaching the end portion 28ae and the end portion 28be. It may spread on a plane.
  • the first surface 28a and the second surface 28b of the hole reinforcing portion 28 are ends on the same plane as the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 over a predetermined distance, for example, at least 300 ⁇ m. It may extend from the portion 22af and the end portion 22bf to the side and then bend or bend. Note that “on the same plane” means that, as in the case of the above-described step, the first and second surfaces 28a and 28b of the hole reinforcing portion 28 extend laterally from the end 22af and the end 22bf over at least 300 ⁇ m. This means that the distance in the thickness direction of the unit base material 22 between the portion and the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base material 22 is 10 ⁇ m or less.
  • the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 includes a first wall surface 25d and a second wall surface 25e.
  • the first wall surface 25 d intersects with the first surface 22 a of the unit base material 22, and spreads toward the center side of the through hole 25 toward the second surface 22 b side of the unit base material 22.
  • the second wall surface 25e intersects the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22, expands toward the center of the through hole 25 toward the first surface 22a side of the unit base member 22, and joins the first wall surface 25d. ing.
  • the hole reinforcing portion 28 sandwiches the wall surface 25 c of the unit base material 22, the hole reinforcing portion 28 can be firmly adhered to the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22.
  • the first wall surface 25d and the second wall surface 25e having such a shape are the same as the first side surface 22d and the second side surface 22e of the side surface 22c, and the first surface 22a side and the second surface 22b of the unit base material 22. It is obtained by wet etching the unit base material 22 from both sides to form the through hole 25.
  • the covering dimension of the hole reinforcing portion 28 is the length of the hole reinforcing portion 28 in the direction along the normal direction of the side surface 28c, as in the case of the reinforcing portion 26 of the first embodiment described above. That is.
  • the minimum value Tmin and the maximum value Tmin of the covering dimension of the hole reinforcing portion 28 can be set in the same range as in the case of the reinforcing portion 26 of the first embodiment described above.
  • the thickness of the cover glass 20 (that is, the thickness of the unit base member 22, the thickness of the side reinforcing portion 26, and the thickness of the hole reinforcing portion 28) is appropriately set according to the required strength, the area of the cover glass 20, and the like. For example, it is in the range of 0.1 mm to 1 mm.
  • FIGS. 19A to 19D (a), (b) and (c) a unit laminate 35 having a unit substrate 22 and protective films 81 and 82 is formed using a substrate 30 made of large tempered glass.
  • the process to form is demonstrated.
  • FIG. 19A, FIG. 19B, FIG. 19C (a), and FIG. 19D (a) are sectional drawings which show the base material 30 in this process.
  • FIG. 19D (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing the vicinity of the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 of the unit laminate body 35 shown in FIG. 19D (a).
  • FIG. 19D (c) is the same as FIG. 19D (a).
  • FIG. 19C (b) is a plan view showing a case where the substrate 30 shown in FIG. 19C (a) is viewed from above.
  • a base material 30 made of large tempered glass is prepared.
  • the base material 30 includes a first surface 30a, a second surface 30b on the opposite side of the first surface 30a, and a side surface 30c extending between the first surface 30a and the second surface 30b.
  • the compressive stress layer 24a is formed on the first surface 30a, the second surface 30b, and the side surface 30c of the base material 30, and the tensile stress layer 24b exists inside the compressive stress layer 24a. is doing.
  • the entire surface of the base material 30 is formed by the compressive stress layer 24a.
  • a protective film forming step is performed in which the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 are provided in a predetermined plurality of sections on the first surface 30a and the second surface 30b of the base material 30.
  • a first protective film 81 is provided on the first surface 30 a of the base material 30, and a second protective film 82 is provided on the second surface 30 b of the base material 30.
  • the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 are provided so as to cover the entire area of the first surface 30a and the second surface 30b of the substrate 30, respectively.
  • the 1st protective film 81 and the 2nd protective film 82 which were provided over the whole region of the 1st surface 30a and the 2nd surface 30b are set for every division of the base material 30.
  • the protective films 81 and 82 are divided into two rows in the first surface 30a of the substrate 30 in two rows in the vertical direction of the paper surface and in three columns in the horizontal direction of the paper surface. Divide every 6 sections. As a result, a gap 81a and a gap 82a are formed in the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 along the boundaries between the sections.
  • the dimension of each section corresponds to the dimension of each unit substrate 22 obtained by cutting the substrate 30. In the present application, each section of the base material 30 before being cut may be expressed as a “unit base material 22”.
  • a hole 81b is formed in the first protective film 81 and a hole 82b is formed in the second protective film 82 at a position corresponding to the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22. To do.
  • the specific method for forming the gaps 81a and 82a and the holes 81b and 82b in the protective films 81 and 82 is not particularly limited, and various methods can be adopted.
  • unnecessary portions (portions that become gaps and holes) of the first protective film 81 may be removed using a mold having a shape corresponding to the shape of the first protective film 81 shown in FIG. 19C (b).
  • unnecessary portions (portions that become gaps and holes) of the second protective film 82 can be removed by using a mold having a shape corresponding to the mold for the second protective film 82.
  • unnecessary portions of the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 may be removed using laser processing.
  • the base material 30 is cut along the gaps 81a and 82a between the protective films 81 and 82 provided in each section of the base material 30 and the base material 30 (unit base material 22).
  • the base material processing process which forms the through-hole 25 is implemented. Specifically, from the first surface 30a side and the second surface 30b side of the base material 30, by performing an etching process of wet etching the base material 30 using the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 as a resist The substrate 30 is cut and the through hole 25 is formed.
  • the etching solution hydrofluoric acid or the like is used as described above. Accordingly, as shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 19D (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing the vicinity of the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 of the unit laminate body 35 shown in FIG. 19D (a).
  • the first side surface 22d crosses the end 22ae and spreads outward as it goes to the second surface 22b side, and crosses the end 22be and goes to the first surface 22a side.
  • a second side surface 22e extending outward is obtained.
  • FIG. 19D (c) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing the vicinity of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 of the unit laminate body 35 shown in FIG.
  • the wall surface 81d of the hole 81b of the first protective film 81 is located closer to the center side of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 than the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22. is doing.
  • the wall surface 82 d of the hole 82 b of the second protective film 82 is located closer to the center side of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 than the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22.
  • Such a relationship between the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 and the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 is similar to the case of the side surface 22c described above, and the first surface 22a of the unit base material 22 and This is realized by forming the through holes 25 in the unit base material 22 by etching from both the second surfaces 22b.
  • the coating liquid 27 is filled into the space surrounded by the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22, the first protective film 81, and the second protective film 82. May be.
  • the side reinforcing portion 26 can be provided on the side surface 22 c of the unit base member 22 of the unit laminate body 35.
  • the second sealing member 85 that seals the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 and the hole 82b of the second protective film 82 from below on the second surface 22b side of the unit base material 22 Arranged on the protective film 82.
  • the material constituting the sealing member 85 is not particularly limited.
  • the sealing member 85 can be configured using a resin film or the like.
  • a hole coating step is performed in which a coating liquid 27 containing a resin material is applied to the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22.
  • a coating liquid 27 containing a resin material is applied to the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22.
  • the coating liquid 27 is applied in the sealed space.
  • the coating liquid 27 is applied in a space surrounded by the sealing member 85, the second protective film 82, the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25, and the first protective film 81.
  • the coating liquid 27 is applied in the sealed space until the coating liquid 27 comes at least partially in contact with the bottom surface 81e (the surface on the unit base material 22 side) of the first protective film 81.
  • the coating liquid 27 may be applied until the first protective film 81 overflows.
  • the upper surface of the hole reinforcing portion 28 to be formed later may be leveled by scraping the coating liquid 27 overflowing on the first protective film 81 with a squeegee or the like.
  • a hole curing step for curing the coating liquid 27 provided on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 is performed.
  • the coating liquid 27 is cured by irradiating the coating liquid 27 with light such as ultraviolet rays.
  • the hole reinforcing portion 28 made of the resin material contained in the coating liquid 27 is formed so as to close the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22.
  • a resin material processing step of processing the hole reinforcing portion 28 to form the through hole 23 in the hole reinforcing portion 28 is performed.
  • the method of processing the hole reinforcing portion 28 is not particularly limited. For example, machining using a drill or the like, laser processing, or the like can be appropriately employed.
  • the sealing member 85 may be removed before the through hole 23 is formed in the hole reinforcing portion 28, or may be removed after the through hole 23 is formed in the hole reinforcing portion 28.
  • the hole reinforcing portion 28 is processed so that the hole reinforcing portion 28 remains on the wall surface 81d of the first protective film 81 and the wall surface 82d of the second protective film 82. It is not limited to this.
  • the hole reinforcing portion 28 may be processed so that the hole reinforcing portion 28 does not remain on the wall surface 81d of the first protective film 81 and the wall surface 82d of the second protective film 82. .
  • the first protective film 81 on the first surface 22a of the unit base 22 and the second protective film 82 on the second surface 22b of the unit base 22 are removed. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 18, it is possible to obtain the cover glass 20 in which the hole reinforcing portion 28 is provided on the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22.
  • the hole reinforcing portion 28 made of a curable resin is provided on the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22. For this reason, when an impact is applied to the cover glass 20, the force transmitted to the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 is alleviated by the hole reinforcing portion 28, and damage such as cracks occurs on the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25. Can be suppressed. Accordingly, even if the compressive stress layer is not formed on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22, the impact resistance of the cover glass 20 can be sufficiently increased.
  • the exposed tensile stress layer 24b can be covered by the hole reinforcing portion 28, so The impact resistance of the cover glass 20 can be made sufficiently high.
  • the coating liquid 27 for constituting the hole reinforcing portion 28 is a bottom surface 81e of the first protective film 81 projecting from the first surface 22a of the unit base member 22 toward the center of the through hole 25, And it applies so that it may touch both the bottom face 82e of the 2nd protective film 82 which protruded from the 2nd surface 22b of the unit base material 22 to the center side of the through-hole 25.
  • the positions of the surfaces 28a and 28b of the hole reinforcing portion 28 are determined according to the positions of the bottom surfaces 81e and 82e of the protective films 81 and 82 in contact with the first surfaces 22a and 22b. For this reason, as shown in FIGS.
  • the external conductor such as a finger
  • the coating liquid 27 when the coating liquid 27 is applied to the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22, the through hole 25 and the second hole of the unit base material 22 on the second surface 22 b side of the unit base material 22.
  • a sealing member 85 for sealing the hole 82b of the protective film 82 from below is disposed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the coating liquid 27 from leaking out.
  • the through hole 23 of the cover glass 20 is machined using a drill or the like on the hole reinforcing portion 28 made of a resin material provided so as to close the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22. It is obtained by applying laser processing or the like.
  • the accuracy of the shape of the through hole 23 is determined according to the processing accuracy of the hole reinforcing portion 28.
  • the substrate 30 can be cut and the through hole 25 can be formed simultaneously by performing the above-described etching process.
  • both the side reinforcing part 26 and the hole reinforcing part 28 can be efficiently formed. .
  • the cover glass 20 in which both the side surface 20c and the through hole 23 are appropriately protected can be manufactured with a small number of man-hours.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 21A, the first protective film 81 is formed so that the hole 81b is formed in the first protective film 81 but the hole is not formed in the second protective film 82.
  • a second protective film 82 may be provided.
  • the above-described gap 82 a is formed in the second protective film 82 between the sections on the base material 30.
  • the substrate 30 is wet-etched using the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 shown in FIG. 21A as resists.
  • the unit base material 22 is wet-etched from the first surface 22a side using the first protective film 81 as a resist at the place where the through hole 25 is formed.
  • the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 intersects the first surface 22a of the unit base member 22 and goes toward the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22. 25 spreads to the center side and intersects the second surface 22b.
  • the through hole 25 is sealed by the second protective film 82 on the second surface 22 b side of the unit base material 22.
  • a hole coating step of coating the coating liquid 27 in the sealed space is performed.
  • the coating liquid 27 is applied in a space surrounded by the second protective film 82, the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25, and the first protective film 81.
  • a hole curing step is performed in which the coating liquid 27 is cured to obtain the hole reinforcing portion 28.
  • a resin material processing step for forming a through hole 23 in the hole reinforcing portion 28 is performed on the hole reinforcing portion 28 by machining or laser processing using a drill or the like. To do.
  • the first protective film 81 on the first surface 22a of the unit base 22 and the second protective film 82 on the second surface 22b of the unit base 22 are removed.
  • the cover glass 20 in which the hole reinforcing portion 28 is provided on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 can be obtained.
  • the role of the second protective film 82 provided on the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 to prevent the coating liquid 27 from leaking out that is, in the above-described second embodiment. It can serve as a sealing member 85. Therefore, the process of providing the sealing member 85, the process of removing the sealing member 85, and the like can be reduced compared to the case of the second embodiment described above. For this reason, the cover glass 20 in which the hole reinforcing portion 28 is provided on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 can be obtained with fewer man-hours.
  • the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 has a shape that expands toward the center side of the through hole 25 from the first surface 22a side of the unit base material 22 toward the second surface 22b side.
  • the shape of the wall surface 25c is for holes in which one of the end portion 28ae on the first surface 28a side or the end portion 28be on the second surface 28b side is scraped off, as in a sixth modification described later. High compatibility with the reinforcing portion 28.
  • the hole 81b is formed in the first protective film 81, but the hole is not formed in the second protective film 82, but the present invention is not limited to this.
  • a hole is formed in the second protective film 82, but the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 may be provided so that no hole is formed in the first protective film 81.
  • the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 is, as shown in FIG. 29 described later, the center side of the through hole 25 from the second surface 22b side of the unit base member 22 toward the first surface 22a side. It has a shape that spreads out.
  • FIG. 23A is a cross-sectional view showing the unit base material 22 in which the through holes 25 are formed by machining or laser processing without using the first protective film 81 or the protective films 81 and 82.
  • microcracks may be generated around the through hole 25.
  • the micro cracks may be removed by wet etching around the through holes 25.
  • the sealing member 85 that seals the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 is used as the second base member 22 as shown in FIG. 23B. Provided on the surface 22b. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24A, a hole coating step of coating the coating liquid 27 in the sealed space is performed.
  • the coating liquid 27 may be applied to the extent that it does not overflow on the first surface 22 a of the unit base member 22. In this case, a step of scraping off the coating liquid 27 using a squeegee or a step of cleaning the first surface 22a contaminated by the coating liquid 27 can be made unnecessary.
  • the coating liquid 27 is applied so as to cover at least the tensile stress layer 24 b exposed on the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25.
  • the tensile stress layer 24b exposed on the wall surface 25c can be covered with the hole reinforcing portion 28, whereby the through hole 25 can be more reliably protected. More preferably, as shown in FIG.
  • the coating liquid 27 is applied so that the first surface 22a of the unit base member 22 and the surface of the coating liquid 27 are connected without a step by the surface tension acting on the coating liquid 27.
  • the coating liquid 27 may be applied to such an extent that it overflows onto the first surface 22a of the unit base material 22, although not shown. In this case, the coating liquid 27 overflowing on the first surface 22a of the unit base member 22 is scraped off using a squeegee or the like. Thereby, the position of the surface of the coating liquid 27 can be matched with the position of the first surface 22 a of the unit base material 22.
  • a hole hardening step for hardening the coating liquid 27 to obtain the hole reinforcing portion 28 is performed.
  • a resin material processing step of processing the hole reinforcing portion 28 to form the through hole 23 in the hole reinforcing portion 28 is performed. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 24B, the cover glass 20 in which the hole reinforcing portion 28 is provided on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 can be obtained.
  • the through holes 25 are formed in the unit base material 22 or the base material 30 by machining or laser processing, and the first protective film 81 or the protective films 81 and 82 are not used.
  • An example in which the coating liquid 27 is applied onto the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 is shown.
  • the first protective film 81 or the like as in the case of the above-described embodiment or the first modification example, The hole reinforcing portion 28 may be formed by applying the coating liquid 27 using the protective films 81 and 82.
  • the unit base material 22 in which the through holes 25 are formed by machining or laser processing is prepared, and then, as shown in FIG. 25A, on the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base material 22.
  • a first protective film 81 and a second protective film 82 are provided with a first protective film 81 and a second protective film 82, respectively.
  • a hole 81 b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 25 in the first protective film 81.
  • the wall surface 81 d of the hole 81 b of the first protective film 81 is located closer to the center of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 than the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22. In this case, preferably, as shown in FIG.
  • the coating liquid 27 is applied in the sealed space until the coating liquid 27 comes into contact with the bottom surface 81e of the first protective film 81 at least partially.
  • the reinforcing portion 28 can be formed.
  • the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 has a convex shape protruding toward the center of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 has been described.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 may have a concave shape that is recessed toward the side opposite to the center of the through hole 25 as shown in FIG. Even in this case, the through hole 25 can be appropriately protected by forming the hole reinforcing portion 28 on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 as in the case of the second embodiment described above. .
  • the hole reinforcing portion 28 is obtained by curing the coating liquid 27, and then the side surface 28c of the hole reinforcing portion 28 is processed to obtain the hole reinforcing portion.
  • the shape of the side surface 28c of 28, that is, the shape of the wall surface 23c of the through hole 23 of the cover glass 20 may be adjusted. Thereby, the appearance of the through-hole 23 can be improved.
  • the hole reinforcing portion 28 is formed of the resin material as described above, the cover glass 20 penetrates more than the case where the wall surface 23c of the through hole 23 of the cover glass 20 is formed of tempered glass. It is easier to process the wall surface 23c of the hole 23 to obtain a desired shape. In addition, strength reduction and microcracks are less likely to occur due to processing.
  • a processing method for example, processing using a polishing machine can be employed.
  • the side surface 28c of the hole reinforcing portion 28 is processed so that both the end portion 28ae on the first surface 28a side and the end portion 28be on the second surface 28b side of the hole reinforcing portion 28 are scraped off. May be.
  • both of the side surface 28c of the hole reinforcing portion 28 that intersects the first surface 28a and the portion that intersects the second surface 28b are processed into round surfaces.
  • FIG. 28 shows an example in which the side surface 28c is processed so that the side surface 28c becomes a round surface.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and although not shown, the side surface 28c becomes a square surface. 28c may be processed.
  • a portion of the side surface 28c of the hole reinforcing portion 28 that intersects the second surface 28b is processed into a round surface.
  • the side surface reinforcing portion 26 provided on the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 may be similarly processed with a round surface. In this case, an impression that the second surface 20b side of the cover glass 20 is rounded over a wide area can be given.
  • the coating liquid 27 is placed in the space sealed by the second protective film 82 or the sealing member 85 provided on the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22.
  • An example in which is applied is shown.
  • the coating liquid 27 having high viscosity is used, the coating liquid 27 may be applied onto the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 without forming such a sealed space.
  • the unit laminated body 35 is held so that the through hole 25 extends in the vertical direction, and is surrounded by the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25, the first protective film 81, and the second protective film 82.
  • the coating liquid 27 may be applied in the remaining space.
  • the coating liquid 27 may be applied on the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 without providing the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82. Even in these cases, if the coating liquid 27 has sufficient viscosity, the coating liquid 27 stays on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25, so that the hole reinforcing portion 28 is formed on the wall surface 25c. Can do.
  • the coating liquid 27 can be applied on the wall surface 25c so as not to block the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22. For this reason, the hole reinforcement part 28 in which the through-hole 23 was formed can be obtained, without implementing the above-mentioned resin material processing process.
  • the viscosity of the coating liquid 27 used in this modification is set so that the coating liquid 27 can remain on the wall surface 25c until the coating liquid 27 is cured.
  • the viscosity of the coating liquid 27 is in the range of 20 to 50 Pa ⁇ s.
  • the cover glass 20 is configured to perform not only a role of protecting the display device 15 but also a touch panel function
  • the first surface 20a on the display device 15 side of the cover glass 20 includes a sensor electrode for detecting the approach or contact of the external conductor, as in the case of the first embodiment described above.
  • a touch panel sensor unit 40 is provided.
  • the non-active area Aa2 of the first surface 20a of the cover glass 20 may be further provided with a decorating unit 60 for exhibiting a desired color.
  • FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating the touch panel sensor unit 40 provided on the first surface 20 a of the cover glass 20. In FIG. 32, the decorating unit 60 is omitted for convenience of explanation.
  • FIG. 32 is a plan view showing the cover glass 20 as viewed from the first surface 20a side.
  • the decorating unit 60 is omitted for convenience of explanation. Since the configuration of the touch panel sensor unit 40 is the same as the configuration of the touch panel sensor unit 40 in the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof is omitted.
  • 33 and 34 are cross-sectional views taken along line XXXIII and line XXXIV of cover glass 20 shown in FIG. 32, respectively.
  • the decoration portion 60 is arranged so as to be positioned closer to the observer side than the extraction wiring 43.
  • the decoration part 60 is visually recognized through the cover glass 20 from the observer side. That is, in the display device 10 with the cover glass, the appearance of the inactive area Aa2 is determined by the decorating unit 60 and its peripheral components.
  • the color of the decoration part 60 is selected according to the design property calculated
  • FIG. 34 shows an example in which the decorative portion 60 is provided so as to overlap the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 when viewed along the normal direction of the cover glass 20.
  • the decorative portion 60 may be provided so as not to overlap the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 when viewed along the normal direction of the cover glass 20.
  • the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 may partially overlap the decorating portion 60 when viewed along the normal direction of the cover glass 20.
  • the element part formation process which forms the element parts 70 is implemented.
  • the timing of performing the element part forming step is no particular limitation on the timing of performing the element part forming step, and various variations are conceivable.
  • the element part forming step may be performed prior to the above-described protective film forming step in which the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 are provided on the substrate 30.
  • the first protective film 81 not only serves to protect the first surface 30a of the base material 30 during the etching process, but also includes the element portion 70 provided on the first surface 30a of the base material 30. It will also play a role of protection.
  • the element 30 is provided on the first surface 22a of the unit base material 22 after the base material 30 is wet-etched by using the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 as resists to obtain the unit base material 22.
  • the step of applying the coating liquid 27 to form the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 may be performed prior to the element portion forming step or after the element portion forming step. May be.
  • the side reinforcing part 26 and the hole reinforcing part 28 are configured to exhibit the same color as the decorative part 60.
  • the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 may include a color pigment having the same color as the color pigment included in the decorative portion 60.
  • an area of the side reinforcing part 26 and the hole reinforcing part 28 that does not overlap with the decorative part 60 when viewed from the normal direction of the cover glass 20 is visually recognized as an area of the same color as the decorative part 60. become. For this reason, the area
  • the decorating unit 60 is formed by applying a coating liquid containing a resin material and a pigment on the unit base material 22.
  • the coating liquid to the vicinity of the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 and the vicinity of the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25.
  • the decorative part 60 is provided to the vicinity of the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 and the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25.
  • the design effect can be produced in the vicinity of the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 and the region in the vicinity of the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25. For this reason, the difficulty required for the process of providing the decorating part 60 can be reduced.
  • the cover glass 20 includes the touch panel sensor unit 40 but may not include the decorating unit 60.
  • the cover glass 20 includes the decorating unit 60 but may not include the touch panel sensor unit 40.
  • the color of the side reinforcing part 26 and the hole reinforcing part 28 is the same as the color of the decorative part 60.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and the side reinforcing part The part 26 and the hole reinforcing part 28 may be configured to exhibit a color different from that of the decorative part 60.
  • the side reinforcement part 26 and the hole reinforcement part 28 may be configured to exhibit a predetermined color. In this case, even if the decorative portion 60 is not provided, the side face reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 can improve design such as prevention of light leakage.
  • a transparent conductive material having translucency is used as a material constituting the sensor electrodes 41 and 42 of the touch panel sensor unit 40 .
  • a so-called mesh sensor type composed of fine metal wires in which an impermeable conductive material such as a silver alloy or copper is arranged in a mesh shape may be employed.
  • the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 is sealed in a state where it is sealed by the second protective film 82 or the sealing member 85 on the second surface 22b side.
  • the coating liquid 27 is applied in the space.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the coating liquid 27 can remain on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 until the coating liquid 27 is cured, the through hole 25 is firmly sealed on the second surface 22b side. There is no need to be.
  • the coating liquid 27 applied from the first surface 22a side may leak from the second surface 22b side through the through hole 25.
  • the through hole 25 is firmly sealed on the second surface 22b side.
  • the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 are formed after the resin material processing step for forming the through hole 23 by processing the hole reinforcing portion 28 is performed.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 may be removed before the resin material processing step is performed.
  • the resin material It can be said that it is preferable to remove the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 after performing the processing steps.
  • the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 may be configured to suppress the cover glass 20 from being charged.
  • the side reinforcing part 26 and the hole reinforcing part 28 may contain conductive particles. Thereby, it can suppress that the side reinforcement part 26, the hole reinforcement part 28, and the unit base material 22 are charged, and it can suppress that electrostatic breakdown arises by this.
  • the conductive particles added to the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 include particles made of carbon black. The conductive particles are preferably added so that the surface resistance of the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 is in the range of 10 5 to 10 8 ⁇ / ⁇ .
  • a filler may be added to the resin material contained in the coating liquid 27 in order to reduce shrinkage when the coating liquid 27 is cured. Since the filler has a smaller degree of shrinkage due to heat than the resin material, by adding the filler, the coating liquid 27 is cured to form the entire side reinforcing portion 26 or hole reinforcing portion 28. The degree of shrinkage can be reduced. Examples of the filler include carbon black particles. If a filler is added, the light is blocked by the filler, which hinders the polymerization reaction of the photocurable resin, and it is considered that the curing does not proceed sufficiently. In consideration of such problems, a thermosetting resin may be further added to the resin material included in the coating liquid 27.
  • the protective films 81 and 82 are configured by sticking a biaxially stretched polypropylene sheet or an unstretched polypropylene sheet to the base material 30 through the adhesive layer are shown.
  • the method for forming the protective films 81 and 82 is not particularly limited.
  • a photosensitive resist film is bonded to each of the first surface 30a and the second surface 30b of the substrate 30, and then the photosensitive resist film is irradiated with ultraviolet rays or the like according to a desired shape using a photomask or the like.
  • the protective films 81 and 82 can be provided on the substrate 30 by irradiating light and patterning with a developing solution such as an acidic solution, an alkaline solution, or an organic solvent.
  • Example 1 The reinforcing portion 26 was formed on the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 using the method shown in FIGS. 7A to 7D described above.
  • a material for constituting the reinforcing portion 26 three kinds of materials such as an acrylic resin, an epoxy resin, and a polyene-polythiol resin were used.
  • UV-3300 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd. was used as the acrylic resin.
  • TB3114 manufactured by ThreeBond Co., Ltd. was used.
  • the polyene-polythiol resin Photorec A-784 manufactured by Sekisui Chemical Co., Ltd. was used.
  • three unit base materials 22 provided with the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 were prepared.
  • the unit base material 22 a surface of 0.7 mm thick aluminosilicate glass provided with a 24 ⁇ m thick compressive stress layer by chemical strengthening was used.
  • the coating liquid 27 containing any one of the above-described three types of resins was applied to the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22, respectively. Thereafter, the coating liquid 27 was cured by irradiating light to the coating liquid 27, thereby obtaining the reinforcing portion 26.
  • the viscosity of the coating liquid 27 and the conditions for curing the coating liquid 27 the conditions recommended by the material manufacturer that provides the resin material contained in the coating liquid 27 were adopted.
  • the side face 26c of the obtained reinforcing part 26 was touched with a hand to evaluate whether or not it was sticky. As a result, no stickiness was felt with respect to the reinforcing portion 26 composed of the epoxy resin and the polyene-polythiol resin. On the other hand, stickiness was felt with respect to the reinforcing portion 26 made of acrylic resin.
  • the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 is a portion that is exposed to an external environment such as the atmosphere when cured. Therefore, when the acrylic resin is used, it is considered that the polymerization reaction is inhibited by oxygen, and as a result, the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 remains uncured. On the other hand, the degree to which the polymerization reaction of the polyene-polythiol resin is inhibited by oxygen is smaller than that of the acrylic resin. For this reason, it is considered that the reinforcing portion 26 made of the polyene-polythiol resin could prevent the side surface 26c from sticking.
  • Example 2 The printability of the above-mentioned three types of resins used in Example 1 was evaluated. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 36A, a glass plate 90 was prepared. Next, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), a coating liquid containing any of the above-mentioned three types of resins is applied on the glass plate 90, and then the coating liquid is cured, whereby the glass plate 90 is coated. A resin layer 91 was formed. Next, as shown in FIG. 36 (c), printing patterns 92a to 92f are provided on the resin layer 91 by printing a plurality of types of ink set to have different surface tensions on the resin layer 91. .
  • the printing patterns 92a to 92f are respectively constituted by ink having a surface tension of 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, and 42 mN / m.
  • a set of # 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, 42 of “JUMBO SURFACE TENSION TEST PENS” manufactured by Corona Supplies Ltd. was used as a means for printing such an ink on the resin layer 91.
  • the number after # represents the surface tension (unit: mN / m) of the ink contained in the pen.
  • FIG. 36D shows an example of the state of the print patterns 92a to 92f after one hour has elapsed.
  • the ink is repelled from the base (here, the resin layer 91), and as a result, the printing pattern is likely to be disturbed. That is, in the print patterns 92a to 92f shown in FIG. 36, the pattern located on the right side, that is, the pattern on the print pattern 92f side, is easily repelled from the resin layer 91 and disturbed.
  • the resin layer 91 has printability for the print patterns 92a to 92d (pattern with a surface tension of 32 to 38 mN / m), but the print patterns 92e and 92f (surface tension) Is 40, 42 mN / m pattern).
  • Table 1 shows the evaluation results of printability.
  • ⁇ means that the printing pattern made of ink was not disturbed (ink repelling)
  • x means that ink repelling occurred.
  • the resin layer 91 composed of an acrylic resin and a polyene-polythiol resin had printability for ink having a surface tension of 32 to 42 mN / m.
  • the resin layer 91 made of an epoxy resin has printability for ink having a surface tension of 32 mN / m, but has printability for ink having a surface tension of 34 to 42 mN / m. It wasn't.
  • the polyene-polythiol-based resin prevents the pattern from being disturbed by repelling the coating liquid even when the surface tension of the coating liquid such as ink applied thereon is large. Can do. Therefore, when a component such as the second decorative portion 62 is provided on the first surface 26a of the reinforcing portion 26, it can be said that the reinforcing portion 26 is preferably configured using a polyene-polythiol resin.
  • Example 3 The impact resistance of epoxy resins and polyene-polythiol resins was evaluated. Specifically, first, in the same manner as in Example 1, cover glasses 20 each having a reinforcing portion 26 made of an epoxy resin and a polyene-polythiol resin were produced. For comparison, a cover glass 20 without the reinforcing portion 26 was produced. Next, as shown in FIG. 37, impact was applied to the side surface 20 c of the cover glass 20 using the striking means 94. When the reinforcing portion 26 is provided, the side surface 20 c of the cover glass 20 is configured by the side surface 26 c of the reinforcing portion 26.
  • a round bar made of stainless steel (SUS) having a length of 35 cm and having a predetermined diameter was used.
  • tests were performed using SUS round bars having diameters of 0.50, 0, 75, 1.00, and 1.25 cm, respectively.
  • SUS stainless steel
  • the cover glass 20 and the striking means 94 supported by the supporting means 95 are placed on the placing table 97.
  • the cover glass 20 is placed so that the side surface 20c faces upward.
  • the support means 95 rotates the striking means 94 over 90 ° about the other end 94b until the one end 94a of the striking means 94 changes from a state in which the one end 94a faces directly upward to a state in which the one end 94a of the striking means 94 is rotated.
  • the other end 94b of the striking means 94 is supported so as to collide with the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20. In this case, collision energy determined by the length and diameter of the striking means 94 can be accurately applied to the side surface 20 c of the cover glass 20.
  • the 1st surface 20a and the 2nd surface 20b of the cover glass 20 are hold
  • Means 96 may be provided.
  • the hardness of the epoxy resin is excessively high as the hardness of the material for constituting the reinforcing portion 26 of the cover glass 20 and is therefore brittle. For this reason, when an impact is applied to the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 using the striking means 94, the reinforcing portion 26 is at least partially broken, and as a result, sufficient bending strength of the cover glass 20 can be maintained. It is thought that it was not possible.
  • the hardness of the polyene-polythiol resin is within an appropriate range, for example, within the range of D50 to D75 as described above. For this reason, the reinforcing portion 26 made of the polyene-polythiol resin can absorb the impact applied from the striking means 94 by elastic deformation. For this reason, it is thought that sufficient bending strength of the cover glass 20 could be maintained even after the impact was applied.
  • Example 4 The above three types of resins used in Example 1 were evaluated for moisture resistance. Specifically, first, in the same manner as in Example 1, the cover glasses 20 each including the reinforcing portion 26 made of the above-described three types of resins were produced. Next, each cover glass 20 was placed in a high temperature and high humidity environment at a temperature of 85 ° C. and a relative humidity of 85% for 240 hours. Thereafter, whether or not a change such as discoloration occurred in the appearance of each cover glass 20 was visually evaluated.
  • the reinforcing portion 26 is sufficiently in close contact with the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 can be determined by holding the reinforcing portion 26 by hand, or the striking means used in the above-described fourth embodiment with respect to the reinforcing portion 26. Evaluation was performed by applying an impact using 94. As a result, it was confirmed that the appearance of the reinforcing portion 26 and the adhesion of the reinforcing portion 26 were sufficiently maintained for any of the cover glasses 20 provided with the reinforcing portion 26 made of three types of resins.
  • Example 5 The light resistance of the above-mentioned three types of resins used in Example 1 was evaluated. Specifically, first, in the same manner as in Example 1, the cover glasses 20 each including the reinforcing portion 26 made of the above-described three types of resins were produced. Next, each cover glass 20 was irradiated with light using SUNTEST CPS + manufactured by Atlas Material Testing Technology. Thereafter, whether or not a change such as discoloration occurred in the appearance of each cover glass 20 was visually evaluated.
  • the reinforcing portion 26 is sufficiently in close contact with the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 can be determined by holding the reinforcing portion 26 by hand, or the striking means used in the above-described fourth embodiment with respect to the reinforcing portion 26. Evaluation was performed by applying an impact using 94. As a result, it was confirmed that the appearance of the reinforcing portion 26 and the adhesion of the reinforcing portion 26 were sufficiently maintained for any of the cover glasses 20 provided with the reinforcing portion 26 made of three types of resins.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Nonlinear Science (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Mathematical Physics (AREA)
  • Devices For Indicating Variable Information By Combining Individual Elements (AREA)
  • Surface Treatment Of Glass (AREA)
  • Liquid Crystal (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is a cover glass that includes a reinforcing part having an appropriate degree of strength and ductility. The cover glass is provided with a unit substrate comprising glass and a reinforcing part which is provided on a side surface of the unit substrate and contains a resin material. The resin material that constitutes the reinforcing part has a polyene-polythiol-based resin that contains an ene compound and a thiol compound.

Description

カバーガラス、カバーガラス付き表示装置およびカバーガラスの製造方法Cover glass, display device with cover glass, and method of manufacturing cover glass
　本発明は、表示装置上に設けられるカバーガラスに関する。また本発明は、カバーガラスが設けられた表示装置に関する。また本発明は、カバーガラスの製造方法に関する。 The present invention relates to a cover glass provided on a display device. The present invention also relates to a display device provided with a cover glass. The present invention also relates to a method for manufacturing a cover glass.
　従来から、液晶ディスプレイや有機ＥＬディスプレイなどの表示装置の観察者側に、表示装置の表示面を保護するためのカバーガラスを設けることが知られている。タッチパネル機能が表示装置に搭載される場合、カバーガラスは、表示装置や、表示装置の観察者側に設けられるタッチパネルセンサを保護するという役割も果たす。なお、カバーガラスとタッチパネルセンサとが一体に構成されたものも知られている。 Conventionally, it is known to provide a cover glass for protecting the display surface of a display device on the viewer side of a display device such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL display. When the touch panel function is mounted on the display device, the cover glass also serves to protect the display device and a touch panel sensor provided on the viewer side of the display device. Note that a cover glass and a touch panel sensor are integrally formed.
　近年、スマートフォンやタブレットＰＣなど、表示装置付きの携帯端末の普及が著しい。携帯端末においては、使用環境において生ずる落下衝撃に対する耐久性が求められる。よって表示装置を保護するカバーガラスには、頻繁に生じる衝撃に耐え得るような高い強度が求められる。このような背景の下、例えば特許文献１において、圧縮応力が生じている圧縮応力層がその表面に形成されている強化ガラスを用いてカバーガラスを構成することが提案されている。 In recent years, mobile terminals with a display device such as smartphones and tablet PCs have been widely used. In a portable terminal, durability against a drop impact generated in a use environment is required. Therefore, the cover glass that protects the display device is required to have a high strength that can withstand a frequently occurring impact. Under such a background, for example, Patent Document 1 proposes that a cover glass is configured using a tempered glass having a compressive stress layer on which a compressive stress is generated.
　特許文献１においては、大型の強化ガラスを分割して個片化することにより、個々の表示装置の寸法に対応した寸法を有するカバーガラスが作製されている。ところで強化ガラスの圧縮応力層は、化学処理、又は、熱処理によってガラス表面に形成されるものである。従って、特許文献１のように大型の強化ガラスを分割した場合、得られるカバーガラスの側面には、引張応力が生じている引張応力層が露出することになる。このため特許文献１に記載の方法によっては、側面における十分な強度を備えたカバーガラスを製造することができないと考えられる。 In Patent Document 1, a cover glass having a size corresponding to the size of each display device is manufactured by dividing a large tempered glass into individual pieces. By the way, the compressive stress layer of tempered glass is formed on the glass surface by chemical treatment or heat treatment. Therefore, when a large tempered glass is divided as in Patent Document 1, a tensile stress layer in which a tensile stress is generated is exposed on the side surface of the obtained cover glass. For this reason, it is considered that a cover glass having sufficient strength on the side surface cannot be manufactured by the method described in Patent Document 1.
　一方、カバーガラスの側面上に樹脂を設けることによってカバーガラスの側面の強度を高めるという手法が提案されている。例えば特許文献２においては、カバーガラスの側面を含むカバーガラスの外周面を、プラスチック膜によって縁取ることが提案されている。縁取り方法としては、射出成形法、ディスペンシング法、噴霧塗装法やローラー塗装法などが提案されている。プラスチック膜の材料の例としては、エポキシ系樹脂またはアクリル系樹脂が挙げられている。 On the other hand, a technique has been proposed in which the strength of the side surface of the cover glass is increased by providing a resin on the side surface of the cover glass. For example, Patent Document 2 proposes that the outer peripheral surface of the cover glass including the side surface of the cover glass is bordered by a plastic film. As the edging method, an injection molding method, a dispensing method, a spray coating method, a roller coating method, and the like have been proposed. Examples of the material of the plastic film include an epoxy resin or an acrylic resin.
特開２０１２－８８９４６号公報JP 2012-88946 A 特開２０１２－１１１６８８号公報JP 2012-111688 A
　特許文献２に記載のようにカバーガラスの外周面がプラスチック膜によって縁取られる場合、プラスチック膜を構成する樹脂材料が、大気などの外部環境に対して露出することになる。一方、樹脂材料を所定の場所に設ける際には、通常、はじめに、所定の流動性を有するように調整された樹脂材料を対象物上に塗布し、その後、樹脂材料の重合反応を生じさせることによって樹脂材料を硬化または固化させるという工程が実施される。従って、カバーガラスの外周面に設けられるプラスチック膜は、大気などの外部環境に対して露出した環境下で進行した重合反応に基づいて形成されることになる。一方、アクリル系樹脂は一般に高い反応性を有している。このため、アクリル系樹脂を用いてプラスチック膜を構成する場合、重合反応が酸素によって阻害され、この結果、重合反応が十分に進行できず、プラスチック膜の十分な硬度を得ることができないと考えられる。 When the outer peripheral surface of the cover glass is bordered by a plastic film as described in Patent Document 2, the resin material constituting the plastic film is exposed to the external environment such as the atmosphere. On the other hand, when the resin material is provided in a predetermined place, usually, first, the resin material adjusted to have a predetermined fluidity is applied on the object, and then a polymerization reaction of the resin material is caused. A step of curing or solidifying the resin material is performed. Therefore, the plastic film provided on the outer peripheral surface of the cover glass is formed based on a polymerization reaction that has proceeded in an environment exposed to an external environment such as the atmosphere. On the other hand, acrylic resins generally have high reactivity. For this reason, when a plastic film is formed using an acrylic resin, the polymerization reaction is inhibited by oxygen, and as a result, the polymerization reaction cannot sufficiently proceed, and it is considered that sufficient hardness of the plastic film cannot be obtained. .
　また、カバーガラスの外周面に設けられるプラスチック膜には、衝撃からカバーガラスを保護することができるよう、十分に高い硬度が求められる。一方、プラスチック膜の硬度が高すぎると、プラスチック膜が脆くなり、この結果、プラスチック膜の靱性が低下してしまう。一方、エポキシ系樹脂は一般に高い硬度を有しており、例えば、Ｄ９０前後の硬度を有している。このため、頻繁に衝撃が加えられ得るカバーガラスの用途においては、エポキシ系樹脂を用いることは不適切であると考えらえる。なお「Ｄ９０」とは、タイプＤのデュロメータで測定することにより得られる硬度の値が９０であることを意味している。 Also, the plastic film provided on the outer peripheral surface of the cover glass is required to have a sufficiently high hardness so that the cover glass can be protected from impact. On the other hand, if the hardness of the plastic film is too high, the plastic film becomes brittle, and as a result, the toughness of the plastic film decreases. On the other hand, the epoxy resin generally has a high hardness, for example, a hardness of around D90. For this reason, it is considered that it is inappropriate to use an epoxy-based resin in the application of a cover glass to which an impact can be frequently applied. “D90” means that the hardness value obtained by measuring with a type D durometer is 90.
　第１の本発明は、このような点を考慮してなされたものであり、適切な樹脂材料から構成された補強部を備えたカバーガラスおよびカバーガラス付き表示装置を提供することを目的とする。 The first aspect of the present invention has been made in consideration of such points, and an object thereof is to provide a cover glass having a reinforcing portion made of an appropriate resin material and a display device with the cover glass. .
　また、スマートフォンやタブレットＰＣなどの携帯端末には通常、通話用のスピーカーや、使用者を撮影するためのインカメラなどが、携帯端末の前面側に設けられている。この場合、音質や画質を向上させるため、カバーガラスのうちスピーカーやインカメラと重なる部分に貫通孔が形成されることがある。一方、貫通孔が形成されることは、貫通孔の周辺においてカバーガラスの耐衝撃性が低下することを意味している。耐衝撃性の低下は、貫通孔の壁面に強化ガラスの引張応力層が露出している場合にさらに顕著になる。しかしながら従来、本件発明者らが知る限りにおいて、カバーガラスの側面の補強方法については数多く提案されているが、貫通孔の壁面の補強方法についてはあまり検討がなされていない。 Also, mobile terminals such as smartphones and tablet PCs are usually provided with a speaker for calling and an in-camera for photographing the user on the front side of the mobile terminal. In this case, in order to improve sound quality and image quality, a through hole may be formed in a portion of the cover glass that overlaps the speaker or the in-camera. On the other hand, the formation of the through hole means that the impact resistance of the cover glass is lowered around the through hole. The reduction in impact resistance becomes more remarkable when the tensile stress layer of tempered glass is exposed on the wall surface of the through hole. However, as far as the inventors of the present invention know, many methods for reinforcing the side surface of the cover glass have been proposed. However, a method for reinforcing the wall surface of the through hole has not been studied much.
　第２の本発明は、このような点を考慮してなされたものであり、単位基材の貫通孔の壁面が補強されたカバーガラスおよびカバーガラス付き表示装置を提供することを目的とする。 The second aspect of the present invention has been made in consideration of such points, and an object thereof is to provide a cover glass and a display device with a cover glass in which the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material is reinforced.
　第１の本発明は、表示装置に設けられるカバーガラスであって、第１面、前記第１面と反対側の第２面、および前記第１面と前記第２面との間に広がる側面を含み、ガラスからなる単位基材と、前記単位基材の側面上に設けられ、樹脂材料を含む補強部と、を備え、前記補強部の前記樹脂材料が、エン化合物およびチオール化合物を含むポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂を有している、カバーガラスである。 1st this invention is the cover glass provided in a display apparatus, Comprising: The 1st surface, the 2nd surface on the opposite side to the said 1st surface, and the side surface extended between the said 1st surface and the said 2nd surface A unit base material made of glass, and a reinforcing part provided on a side surface of the unit base material and including a resin material, wherein the resin material of the reinforcing part includes a polyene containing an ene compound and a thiol compound. A cover glass having a polythiol-based resin.
　第１の本発明によるカバーガラスにおいて、前記補強部は、前記単位基材の外形を構成する側面上に設けられ、前記樹脂材料を含む側面用補強部を有していてもよい。 In the cover glass according to the first aspect of the present invention, the reinforcing portion may be provided on a side surface constituting the outer shape of the unit base material and may include a side reinforcing portion including the resin material.
　第１の本発明によるカバーガラスにおいて、前記単位基材には、前記第１面および前記第２面を貫通する貫通孔が形成されており、前記補強部は、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔上に設けられ、前記樹脂材料を含む孔用補強部を有していてもよい。 In the cover glass according to the first aspect of the present invention, the unit base material is formed with a through hole penetrating the first surface and the second surface, and the reinforcing portion is the through hole of the unit base material. You may have the hole reinforcement part provided on the top and containing the said resin material.
　第１の本発明によるカバーガラスにおいて、前記補強部の表面上に、少なくとも部分的に、所定の色を呈する加飾部が設けられていてもよい。 In the cover glass according to the first aspect of the present invention, a decorative portion exhibiting a predetermined color may be provided at least partially on the surface of the reinforcing portion.
　第１の本発明によるカバーガラスにおいて、前記補強部の前記樹脂材料のポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂は、２０～８０重量％のエン化合物と、２０～８０重量％のチオール化合物とを含んでいてもよい。 In the cover glass according to the first aspect of the present invention, the polyene-polythiol resin of the resin material of the reinforcing portion may contain 20 to 80% by weight of an ene compound and 20 to 80% by weight of a thiol compound. .
　第２の本発明は、表示装置に設けられるカバーガラスであって、第１面、および前記第１面と反対側の第２面を含み、かつ前記第１面および前記第２面を貫通する貫通孔が形成されたガラスからなる単位基材と、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の壁面上に設けられ、樹脂材料を含む孔用補強部と、を備える、カバーガラスである。 2nd this invention is the cover glass provided in a display apparatus, Comprising: The 1st surface and the 2nd surface on the opposite side to the said 1st surface are penetrated, The said 1st surface and the said 2nd surface are penetrated. A cover glass comprising: a unit base material made of glass in which a through hole is formed; and a hole reinforcing portion that is provided on a wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material and includes a resin material.
　第２の本発明によるカバーガラスにおいて、前記孔用補強部は、前記単位基材の前記第１面の端部から側方へ延びる第１面、前記単位基材の前記第２面の端部から側方へ延びる第２面、および、前記孔用補強部の前記第１面と前記第２面との間に広がる側面を含み、前記単位基材の前記第１面と前記孔用補強部の前記第１面との間の段差は１０μｍ以下であり、前記単位基材の前記第２面と前記孔用補強部の前記第２面との間の段差は１０μｍ以下であってもよい。 In the cover glass according to the second aspect of the present invention, the hole reinforcing portion includes a first surface extending laterally from an end portion of the first surface of the unit base material, and an end portion of the second surface of the unit base material. A second surface extending laterally from the surface, and a side surface extending between the first surface and the second surface of the hole reinforcing portion, the first surface of the unit base material and the hole reinforcing portion The step between the first surface and the first surface of the unit base material may be 10 μm or less, and the step between the second surface of the unit base material and the second surface of the hole reinforcing portion may be 10 μm or less.
　第２の本発明によるカバーガラスにおいて、前記単位基材は、少なくとも前記第１面および前記第２面に形成された圧縮応力層と、前記第１面側の前記圧縮応力層と前記第２面側の前記圧縮応力層との間に位置する引張応力層と、を含んでいてもよい。 In the cover glass according to the second aspect of the present invention, the unit base material includes at least the compressive stress layer formed on the first surface and the second surface, the compressive stress layer on the first surface side, and the second surface. And a tensile stress layer positioned between the compression stress layer on the side.
　第２の本発明によるカバーガラスにおいて、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の前記壁面に前記引張応力層が露出していてもよい。この場合、好ましくは前記孔用補強部は、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の前記壁面に露出している前記引張応力層が前記孔用補強部によって覆われるよう、形成される。 In the cover glass according to the second aspect of the present invention, the tensile stress layer may be exposed on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material. In this case, preferably, the hole reinforcing portion is formed such that the tensile stress layer exposed on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material is covered with the hole reinforcing portion.
　第２の本発明によるカバーガラスにおいて、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の前記壁面上に設けられた前記孔用補強部の被覆寸法の最小値が、２０μｍ以上であってもよい。 In the cover glass according to the second aspect of the present invention, a minimum value of a covering dimension of the hole reinforcing portion provided on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material may be 20 μm or more.
　第２の本発明によるカバーガラスにおいて、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の前記壁面は、前記単位基材の前記第１面に交わるとともに、前記単位基材の前記第２面側へ向かうにつれて前記貫通孔の中心側へ広がる第１壁面と、前記単位基材の前記第２面に交わるとともに、前記単位基材の前記第１面側へ向かうにつれて前記貫通孔の中心側へ広がり、そして前記第１壁面に合流する第２壁面と、を含んでいてもよい。 In the cover glass according to the second aspect of the present invention, the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material intersects the first surface of the unit base material, and as it goes toward the second surface side of the unit base material. The first wall surface extending to the center side of the through hole intersects the second surface of the unit base material, extends toward the center side of the through hole toward the first surface side of the unit base material, and the first And a second wall surface that merges with the one wall surface.
　第２の本発明によるカバーガラスにおいて、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の前記壁面は、前記単位基材の前記第２面側から前記第１面側へ向かうにつれて前記貫通孔の中心側へ広がっていてもよい。 In the cover glass according to the second aspect of the present invention, the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base member spreads toward the center side of the through hole from the second surface side of the unit base member toward the first surface side. It may be.
　第２の本発明によるカバーガラスにおいて、前記単位基材の前記第１面側には、所定の色を呈する加飾部が設けられており、前記孔用補強部は、前記加飾部と同色を呈するよう構成されていてもよい。また、前記加飾部は、前記カバーガラスの法線方向に沿って見た場合に前記孔用補強部と重なるよう構成されていてもよい。 In the cover glass according to the second aspect of the present invention, a decorating portion exhibiting a predetermined color is provided on the first surface side of the unit base material, and the hole reinforcing portion has the same color as the decorating portion. It may be configured to exhibit. Moreover, the said decoration part may be comprised so that it may overlap with the said reinforcement part for holes, when it sees along the normal line direction of the said cover glass.
　第２の本発明によるカバーガラスにおいて、前記孔用補強部は、所定の色を呈するよう構成されていてもよい。 In the cover glass according to the second aspect of the present invention, the hole reinforcing portion may be configured to exhibit a predetermined color.
　第２の本発明によるカバーガラスにおいて、前記単位基材の前記第１面側に、タッチパネルセンサ部の少なくとも一部が設けられていてもよい。 In the cover glass according to the second aspect of the present invention, at least a part of the touch panel sensor unit may be provided on the first surface side of the unit base material.
　第２の本発明によるカバーガラスにおいて、前記孔用補強部の前記樹脂材料が、ポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂を含んでいてもよい。 In the cover glass according to the second aspect of the present invention, the resin material of the hole reinforcing portion may include a polyene-polythiol resin.
　第２の本発明によるカバーガラスにおいて、前記孔用補強部の前記側面のうち前記孔用補強部の前記第１面と交わる部分または前記第２面と交わる部分の少なくとも一方が、丸面または角面に加工されていてもよい。 In the cover glass according to the second aspect of the present invention, at least one of the side surface of the hole reinforcing portion that intersects the first surface of the hole reinforcing portion or the portion that intersects the second surface is a round surface or a corner. The surface may be processed.
　本発明は、表示装置と、前記表示装置に配置されたカバーガラスと、を備え、前記カバーガラスが、上記記載のカバーガラスからなる、カバーガラス付き表示装置である。 The present invention is a display device with a cover glass, comprising a display device and a cover glass disposed on the display device, wherein the cover glass is made of the cover glass described above.
　本発明は、表示装置に設けられる、貫通孔が形成されたカバーガラスの製造方法であって、第１面、および前記第１面と反対側の第２面を含み、かつ第１面および前記第２面を貫通する貫通孔が形成されたガラスからなる単位基材、を準備する工程と、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の壁面に、樹脂材料を含む塗布液を塗布する塗布工程と、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の壁面上の塗布液を硬化させ、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の壁面上に孔用補強部を形成する硬化工程と、を備える、カバーガラスの製造方法である。 The present invention is a method for manufacturing a cover glass provided with a through-hole provided in a display device, which includes a first surface, and a second surface opposite to the first surface, and the first surface and the A step of preparing a unit base material made of glass in which a through-hole penetrating the second surface is formed; an application step of applying a coating liquid containing a resin material to the wall surface of the through-hole of the unit base material; Curing the coating liquid on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material, and forming a hole reinforcing portion on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material. is there.
　本発明によるカバーガラスの製造方法において、前記単位基材は、少なくとも前記第１面および前記第２面に形成された圧縮応力層と、前記第１面側の前記圧縮応力層と前記第２面側の前記圧縮応力層との間に位置する引張応力層と、を含んでいてもよい。 In the method for manufacturing a cover glass according to the present invention, the unit base material includes at least the compressive stress layer formed on the first surface and the second surface, the compressive stress layer on the first surface side, and the second surface. And a tensile stress layer positioned between the compression stress layer on the side.
　本発明によるカバーガラスの製造方法において、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の前記壁面に前記引張応力層が露出していてもよい。この場合、好ましくは前記孔用補強部は、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の前記壁面に露出している前記引張応力層が前記孔用補強部によって覆われるよう、形成される。 In the method for manufacturing a cover glass according to the present invention, the tensile stress layer may be exposed on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material. In this case, preferably, the hole reinforcing portion is formed such that the tensile stress layer exposed on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material is covered with the hole reinforcing portion.
　本発明によるカバーガラスの製造方法の前記塗布工程において、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔は、前記単位基材の前記第２面側で封止されていてもよい。この場合、前記塗布液は、封止された空間内に前記単位基材の前記第１面側から塗布される。また前記硬化工程において、前記孔用補強部は、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔を塞ぐように形成される。また前記カバーガラスの製造方法は、前記硬化工程の後、前記孔用補強部に貫通孔を形成する樹脂材料加工工程をさらに備えている。 In the coating step of the cover glass manufacturing method according to the present invention, the through hole of the unit base material may be sealed on the second surface side of the unit base material. In this case, the coating liquid is applied from the first surface side of the unit base material in a sealed space. In the curing step, the hole reinforcing portion is formed so as to close the through hole of the unit base material. Moreover, the manufacturing method of the said cover glass is further equipped with the resin material processing process of forming a through-hole in the said reinforcement part for holes after the said hardening process.
　本発明によるカバーガラスの製造方法の前記準備工程において、前記単位基材の前記第１面上には、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔に連通する孔が形成された第１保護膜が設けられており、前記第１保護膜の前記孔の壁面は、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の前記壁面よりも、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の中心側に位置していてもよい。 In the preparation step of the cover glass manufacturing method according to the present invention, a first protective film having a hole communicating with the through hole of the unit base material is provided on the first surface of the unit base material. The wall surface of the hole of the first protective film may be positioned closer to the center of the through hole of the unit base material than the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material.
　本発明によるカバーガラスの製造方法の前記準備工程は、前記孔が形成された前記第１保護膜を前記単位基材の前記第１面上に設ける保護膜形成工程と、前記第１保護膜をレジストとして前記単位基材をウェットエッチングすることによって前記貫通孔を形成するエッチング工程と、を含んでいてもよい。
　この場合、前記保護膜形成工程において、前記第１保護膜の前記孔に対応する位置に孔が形成された第２保護膜が前記単位基材の前記第２面上にさらに設けられ、前記エッチング工程において、前記単位基材は、前記第１保護膜および前記第２保護膜をレジストとして、前記第１面側および前記第２面側からウェットエッチングされ、前記塗布工程において、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔は、前記第２保護膜上に配置された封止部材によって封止されていてもよい。
　若しくは、前記準備工程において、前記単位基材の前記第２面上には、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔を封止する第２保護膜または封止部材が設けられており、前記エッチング工程において、前記単位基材は、前記第１保護膜をレジストとして前記第１面側からウェットエッチングされてもよい。 The preparatory step of the method for manufacturing a cover glass according to the present invention includes a protective film forming step of providing the first protective film on which the holes are formed on the first surface of the unit base material, and the first protective film. And an etching step of forming the through-hole by wet-etching the unit base material as a resist.
In this case, in the protective film forming step, a second protective film having a hole formed at a position corresponding to the hole of the first protective film is further provided on the second surface of the unit base material, and the etching is performed. In the step, the unit base material is wet-etched from the first surface side and the second surface side using the first protective film and the second protective film as a resist, and in the coating step, the unit base material The through hole may be sealed with a sealing member disposed on the second protective film.
Alternatively, in the preparation step, a second protective film or a sealing member that seals the through hole of the unit base material is provided on the second surface of the unit base material, and in the etching step, The unit base material may be wet-etched from the first surface side using the first protective film as a resist.
　本発明によるカバーガラスの製造方法は、前記単位基材の前記第１面側に、加飾部またはタッチパネルセンサ部の少なくともいずれかを含む要素部の少なくとも一部を形成する要素部形成工程をさらに備えていてもよい。 The method for manufacturing a cover glass according to the present invention further includes an element part forming step of forming at least a part of an element part including at least one of a decoration part and a touch panel sensor part on the first surface side of the unit base material. You may have.
　本発明によるカバーガラスの製造方法において、前記要素部形成工程は、前記保護膜形成工程に先行して実施されてもよい。 In the cover glass manufacturing method according to the present invention, the element part forming step may be performed prior to the protective film forming step.
　本発明によれば、適切な硬度および靱性を有する補強部を備えたカバーガラスを提供することができる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a cover glass provided with a reinforcing portion having appropriate hardness and toughness.
図１は、本発明の第１の実施の形態におけるカバーガラス付き表示装置を示す展開図。FIG. 1 is a developed view showing a display device with a cover glass in the first embodiment of the present invention. 図２は、図１のカバーガラスに設けられたタッチパネルセンサ部を示す平面図。FIG. 2 is a plan view showing a touch panel sensor unit provided on the cover glass of FIG. 1. 図３は、図２のカバーガラスの、III線に沿った断面図。FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the cover glass of FIG. 2 along the line III. 図４は、図２のカバーガラスの、IV線に沿った断面図。4 is a cross-sectional view of the cover glass of FIG. 2 taken along line IV. 図５は、図３のカバーガラスの側面を拡大して示す断面図。FIG. 5 is an enlarged cross-sectional view illustrating a side surface of the cover glass of FIG. 3. 図６Ａは、大型の強化ガラスからなる基材を用いて、単位基材および保護膜を有する単位積層体を形成する工程の一部を示す図。FIG. 6A is a diagram showing a part of a step of forming a unit laminate having a unit substrate and a protective film using a substrate made of large tempered glass. 図６Ｂ（ａ）（ｂ）は、大型の強化ガラスからなる基材を用いて、単位基材および保護膜を有する単位積層体を形成する工程の一部を示す図。FIGS. 6B (a) and 6 (b) are diagrams showing a part of a step of forming a unit laminate body having a unit base material and a protective film using a base material made of large tempered glass. 図６Ｃは、大型の強化ガラスからなる基材を用いて、単位基材および保護膜を有する単位積層体を形成する工程の一部を示す図。FIG. 6C is a diagram showing a part of a step of forming a unit laminate having a unit base material and a protective film using a base material made of large tempered glass. 図６Ｄ（ａ）（ｂ）は、大型の強化ガラスからなる基材を用いて、単位基材および保護膜を有する単位積層体を形成する工程の一部を示す図。FIGS. 6D (a) and 6 (b) are diagrams showing a part of a step of forming a unit laminate body having a unit base material and a protective film using a base material made of large tempered glass. 図６Ｅ（ａ）（ｂ）は、大型の強化ガラスからなる基材を用いて、単位基材および保護膜を有する単位積層体を形成する工程の一部を示す図。FIGS. 6E (a) and 6 (b) are diagrams showing a part of a process of forming a unit laminate body having a unit base material and a protective film using a base material made of large tempered glass. 図７Ａは、単位積層体の単位基材の側面に樹脂を設けることによって、側面が補強されたカバーガラスを得るための工程の一部を示す図。FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating a part of a process for obtaining a cover glass whose side surface is reinforced by providing a resin on a side surface of a unit base material of the unit laminate body. 図７Ｂは、単位積層体の単位基材の側面に樹脂を設けることによって、側面が補強されたカバーガラスを得るための工程の一部を示す図。FIG. 7B is a diagram illustrating a part of a process for obtaining a cover glass whose side surface is reinforced by providing a resin on a side surface of a unit base material of the unit laminate body. 図７Ｃは、単位積層体の単位基材の側面に樹脂を設けることによって、側面が補強されたカバーガラスを得るための工程の一部を示す図。FIG. 7C is a diagram showing a part of a process for obtaining a cover glass whose side surface is reinforced by providing a resin on the side surface of the unit base material of the unit laminate body. 図７Ｄは、単位積層体の単位基材の側面に樹脂を設けることによって、側面が補強されたカバーガラスを得るための工程の一部を示す図。FIG. 7D is a diagram showing a part of a process for obtaining a cover glass whose side surface is reinforced by providing a resin on the side surface of the unit base material of the unit laminate body. 図８は、第１の実施の形態の第１の変形例におけるカバーガラスを示す断面図。FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a first modification of the first embodiment. 図９は、第１の実施の形態の第２の変形例におけるカバーガラスを示す断面図。FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a second modification of the first embodiment. 図１０は、第１の実施の形態の第３の変形例におけるカバーガラスを示す断面図。FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a third modification of the first embodiment. 図１１は、第１の実施の形態の第４の変形例におけるカバーガラスを示す断面図。FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a fourth modification of the first embodiment. 図１２は、第１の実施の形態の第５の変形例におけるカバーガラスを示す断面図。FIG. 12 is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a fifth modification of the first embodiment. 図１３は、第１の実施の形態の第６の変形例におけるカバーガラスを示す断面図。FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a sixth modification of the first embodiment. 図１４は、単位基材に形成された貫通孔の壁面に補強部が形成される例を示す図。FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a reinforcing portion is formed on a wall surface of a through hole formed in a unit base material. 図１５は、図１４に示す貫通孔の壁面ａ上に補強部２６を形成する工程を示す図。FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a step of forming the reinforcing portion 26 on the wall surface a of the through hole shown in FIG. 図１６は、第２の実施の形態によるカバーガラスを示す平面図。FIG. 16 is a plan view showing a cover glass according to the second embodiment. 図１７は、図１６のカバーガラスの、XVII線に沿った断面図。17 is a cross-sectional view of the cover glass of FIG. 16 taken along line XVII. 図１８は、図１７のカバーガラスの貫通孔を拡大して示す断面図。18 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the through hole of the cover glass of FIG. 図１９Ａは、大型の強化ガラスからなる基材を用いて、単位基材および保護膜を有する単位積層体を形成する工程の一部を示す図。FIG. 19A is a diagram showing a part of a step of forming a unit laminate having a unit substrate and a protective film using a substrate made of large tempered glass. 図１９Ｂは、大型の強化ガラスからなる基材を用いて、単位基材および保護膜を有する単位積層体を形成する工程の一部を示す図。FIG. 19B is a diagram showing a part of a step of forming a unit laminate including a unit base material and a protective film using a base material made of large tempered glass. 図１９Ｃ（ａ）（ｂ）は、大型の強化ガラスからなる基材を用いて、単位基材および保護膜を有する単位積層体を形成する工程の一部を示す図。FIGS. 19C (a) and 19 (b) are diagrams showing a part of a process of forming a unit laminate having a unit substrate and a protective film using a substrate made of large tempered glass. 図１９Ｄ（ａ）（ｂ）（ｃ）は、大型の強化ガラスからなる基材を用いて、単位基材および保護膜を有する単位積層体を形成する工程の一部を示す図。19D (a), (b), and (c) are diagrams showing a part of a step of forming a unit laminate having a unit substrate and a protective film using a substrate made of large tempered glass. 図２０Ａは、カバーガラスの貫通孔を補強する工程の一部を示す図。FIG. 20A is a diagram showing a part of a step of reinforcing a through hole of a cover glass. 図２０Ｂは、カバーガラスの貫通孔を補強する工程の一部を示す図。FIG. 20B is a diagram showing a part of the step of reinforcing the through hole of the cover glass. 図２０Ｃは、カバーガラスの貫通孔を補強する工程の一部を示す図。FIG. 20C is a diagram showing a part of the step of reinforcing the through hole of the cover glass. 図２０Ｄは、カバーガラスの貫通孔を補強する工程の一部を示す図。FIG. 20D is a diagram showing a part of the step of reinforcing the through hole of the cover glass. 図２１Ａは、第２の実施の形態の第１の変形例における第１保護膜を示す断面図。FIG. 21A is a cross-sectional view showing a first protective film in a first modification of the second embodiment. 図２１Ｂは、第２の実施の形態の第１の変形例において、第２保護膜をレジストとして基材をエッチングすることにより得られる単位積層体を示す断面図。FIG. 21B is a cross-sectional view showing a unit laminate body obtained by etching the base material using the second protective film as a resist in the first modification example of the second embodiment. 図２２Ａは、第２の実施の形態の第１の変形例において、第２保護膜および単位基材の貫通孔によって囲われた空間内に塗布液を塗布する工程を示す図。FIG. 22A is a diagram illustrating a process of applying a coating liquid in a space surrounded by a second protective film and a through hole of a unit base material in the first modification example of the second embodiment. 図２２Ｂは、第２の実施の形態の第１の変形例において、孔用補強部に貫通孔を形成する工程を示す図。FIG. 22B is a diagram showing a step of forming a through hole in the hole reinforcing portion in the first modification of the second embodiment. 図２２Ｃは、第２の実施の形態の第１の変形例におけるカバーガラスを示す断面図。FIG. 22C is a cross-sectional view showing the cover glass in the first modification example of the second embodiment. 図２３Ａは、第２の実施の形態の第２の変形例における単位基材を示す断面図。FIG. 23A is a cross-sectional view showing a unit base material according to a second modification of the second embodiment. 図２３Ｂは、第２の実施の形態の第２の変形例における単位積層体を示す断面図。FIG. 23B is a cross-sectional view showing a unit laminate body in a second modification example of the second embodiment. 図２４Ａは、第２の実施の形態の第２の変形例において、第２保護膜および単位基材の貫通孔によって囲われた空間内に塗布液を塗布する工程を示す図。FIG. 24A is a diagram showing a step of applying a coating liquid in a space surrounded by the second protective film and the through hole of the unit base material in the second modification example of the second embodiment. 図２４Ｂは、第２の実施の形態の第２の変形例におけるカバーガラスを示す断面図。FIG. 24B is a cross-sectional view showing the cover glass in the second modification example of the second embodiment. 図２５Ａは、第２の実施の形態の第３の変形例における単位積層体を示す断面図。FIG. 25A is a cross-sectional view showing a unit laminate body according to a third modification of the second embodiment. 図２５Ｂは、第２の実施の形態の第３の変形例において、第２保護膜および単位基材の貫通孔によって囲われた空間内に塗布液を塗布する工程を示す図。FIG. 25B is a diagram illustrating a process of applying the coating liquid in a space surrounded by the second protective film and the through hole of the unit base material in the third modification example of the second embodiment. 図２５Ｃは、第２の実施の形態の第３の変形例におけるカバーガラスを示す断面図。FIG. 25C is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a third modification of the second embodiment. 図２６は、第２の実施の形態の第４の変形例におけるカバーガラスを示す断面図。FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a fourth modification of the second embodiment. 図２７は、第２の実施の形態の第５の変形例におけるカバーガラスを示す断面図。FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view showing a cover glass in a fifth modification of the second embodiment. 図２８は、第２の実施の形態の第６の変形例におけるカバーガラスの一例を示す断面図。FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a cover glass in a sixth modified example of the second embodiment. 図２９は、第２の実施の形態の第６の変形例におけるカバーガラスのその他の例を示す断面図。FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view showing another example of the cover glass in the sixth modified example of the second embodiment. 図３０は、第２の実施の形態の第７の変形例において、カバーガラスの貫通孔の壁面に塗布された塗布液の一例を示す図。FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating an example of a coating liquid applied to the wall surface of the through hole of the cover glass in the seventh modification example of the second embodiment. 図３１は、第２の実施の形態の第７の変形例において、カバーガラスの貫通孔の壁面に塗布された塗布液のその他の例を示す図。FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating another example of the coating liquid applied to the wall surface of the through hole of the cover glass in the seventh modification example of the second embodiment. 図３２は、第２の実施の形態の第８の変形例において、タッチパネルセンサ部が設けられたカバーガラスの一例を示す平面図。FIG. 32 is a plan view showing an example of a cover glass provided with a touch panel sensor unit in an eighth modification of the second embodiment. 図３３は、図３２のカバーガラスの、XXXIII線に沿った断面図。33 is a cross-sectional view of the cover glass of FIG. 32 taken along line XXXIII. 図３４は、図３２のカバーガラスの、XXXIV線に沿った断面図。34 is a cross-sectional view of the cover glass of FIG. 32 taken along line XXXIV. 図３５は、第２の実施の形態の第８の変形例において、タッチパネルセンサ部が設けられたカバーガラスのその他の例を示す断面図。FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view showing another example of the cover glass provided with the touch panel sensor unit in the eighth modification example of the second embodiment. 図３６（ａ）～（ｄ）は、実施例２において、樹脂の印刷適性を評価する方法を示す図。FIGS. 36A to 36D are diagrams showing a method for evaluating the printability of a resin in Example 2. FIGS. 図３７は、実施例３において、樹脂の耐衝撃性を評価する方法を示す図。FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a method for evaluating the impact resistance of a resin in Example 3.
　第１の実施の形態
　以下、図１乃至図７Ｄを参照して、本発明の第１の実施の形態について説明する。なお、本明細書に添付する図面においては、図示と理解のしやすさの便宜上、適宜縮尺および縦横の寸法比等を、実物のそれらから変更し誇張してある。 First Embodiment Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7D. In the drawings attached to the present specification, for the sake of illustration and ease of understanding, the scale, the vertical / horizontal dimension ratio, and the like are appropriately changed and exaggerated from those of the actual ones.
　（カバーガラス付き表示装置）
　はじめに図１を参照して、カバーガラス付き表示装置１０について説明する。図１に示すように、カバーガラス付き表示装置１０は、表示装置１５とカバーガラス２０とを組み合わせることによって構成されている。図示された表示装置１５は、フラットパネルディスプレイとして構成されている。表示装置１５は、表示面１６ａを有した表示パネル１６と、表示パネル１６に接続された表示制御部（図示せず）と、を有している。表示パネル１６は、映像を表示することができるアクティブエリアＡ１と、アクティブエリアＡ１を取り囲むようにしてアクティブエリアＡ１の外側に配置された非アクティブエリア（額縁領域とも呼ばれる）Ａ２と、を含んでいる。表示制御部は、表示されるべき映像に関する情報を処理し、映像情報に基づいて表示パネル１６を駆動する。表示パネル１６は、表示制御部の制御信号に基づいて、所定の映像を表示面１６ａに表示する。すなわち、表示装置１５は、文字や図等の情報を映像として出力する出力装置としての役割を担っている。 (Display device with cover glass)
First, the display device 10 with a cover glass will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, the display device 10 with a cover glass is configured by combining a display device 15 and a cover glass 20. The illustrated display device 15 is configured as a flat panel display. The display device 15 includes a display panel 16 having a display surface 16 a and a display control unit (not shown) connected to the display panel 16. The display panel 16 includes an active area A1 that can display an image, and an inactive area (also referred to as a frame area) A2 that is disposed outside the active area A1 so as to surround the active area A1. . The display control unit processes information regarding the video to be displayed, and drives the display panel 16 based on the video information. The display panel 16 displays a predetermined image on the display surface 16a based on a control signal from the display control unit. That is, the display device 15 plays a role as an output device that outputs information such as characters and drawings as video.
　図１に示すように、カバーガラス２０は、表示装置１５の観察者側において表示パネル１６の表示面１６ａ上に配置されている。このカバーガラス２０は例えば、表示装置１５の表示面１６ａ上に接着層（図示せず）を介して接着されている。図１において、カバーガラス２０の表示装置側の面（第１面）が符号２０ａで表され、観察者側の面（第２面）が符号２０ｂで表されている。 As shown in FIG. 1, the cover glass 20 is disposed on the display surface 16 a of the display panel 16 on the viewer side of the display device 15. For example, the cover glass 20 is bonded to the display surface 16a of the display device 15 via an adhesive layer (not shown). In FIG. 1, the surface (first surface) on the display device side of the cover glass 20 is represented by reference numeral 20a, and the surface (second surface) on the observer side is represented by reference numeral 20b.
　なお本実施の形態において、カバーガラス２０は、表示装置１５を保護するという機能だけでなく、タッチパネル機能をも提供するように構成されている。具体的には、カバーガラス２０の表示装置１５側の第１面２０ａには、外部導体の接近や接触を検知するためのセンサ電極を含むタッチパネルセンサ部４０が設けられている。またカバーガラス２０の第１面２０ａの非アクティブエリアＡａ２には、所望の色を呈するための第１加飾部６０がさらに設けられている。 In this embodiment, the cover glass 20 is configured to provide not only a function of protecting the display device 15 but also a touch panel function. Specifically, on the first surface 20a of the cover glass 20 on the display device 15 side, a touch panel sensor unit 40 including a sensor electrode for detecting the approach or contact of the external conductor is provided. Moreover, the 1st decorating part 60 for exhibiting a desired color is further provided in the inactive area Aa2 of the 1st surface 20a of the cover glass 20. As shown in FIG.
　（タッチパネルセンサ）
　次に図２を参照して、カバーガラス２０の第１面２０ａに設けられたタッチパネルセンサ部４０について説明する。図２は、カバーガラス２０を第１面２０ａ側から見た場合を示す平面図である。なお図２においては、説明の便宜上、第１加飾部６０が省略されている。 (Touch panel sensor)
Next, the touch panel sensor unit 40 provided on the first surface 20a of the cover glass 20 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing the cover glass 20 as viewed from the first surface 20a side. In FIG. 2, the first decorating unit 60 is omitted for convenience of explanation.
　図２に示すように、カバーガラス２０の第１面２０ａは、表示パネル１６のアクティブエリアＡ１および非アクティブエリアＡ２に対応して、タッチ位置を検出され得る領域に対応するアクティブエリアＡａ１と、アクティブエリアＡａ１の周辺に位置する非アクティブエリアＡａ２と、に区画される。またタッチパネルセンサ部４０は、アクティブエリアＡａ１に配置された複数のセンサ電極４１，４２と、対応するセンサ電極４１，４２に接続されるとともに、カバーガラス２０の非アクティブエリアＡａ２に配置された複数の取出配線４３と、対応する取出配線４３に接続された複数の端子部４４と、を備えている。 As shown in FIG. 2, the first surface 20a of the cover glass 20 corresponds to the active area Aa1 corresponding to the active area A1 and the inactive area A2 of the display panel 16, and the active area Aa1 corresponding to the area where the touch position can be detected. It is partitioned into an inactive area Aa2 located around the area Aa1. In addition, the touch panel sensor unit 40 is connected to the plurality of sensor electrodes 41 and 42 disposed in the active area Aa1 and the corresponding sensor electrodes 41 and 42, and is disposed in the inactive area Aa2 of the cover glass 20. The lead-out wiring 43 and a plurality of terminal portions 44 connected to the corresponding lead-out wiring 43 are provided.
　センサ電極４１，４２は、図２に示すように、第１方向Ｄ１に沿って延びる複数の第１センサ電極４１と、第１方向Ｄ１に直交する第２方向Ｄ２に沿って延びる複数の第２センサ電極４２と、を有している。各センサ電極４１，４２はそれぞれ、直線状に延びるライン部４１ａ，４２ａと、ライン部４１ａ，４２ａから膨出した膨出部４１ｂ，４２ｂと、を有していてもよい。 As shown in FIG. 2, the sensor electrodes 41 and 42 include a plurality of first sensor electrodes 41 extending along the first direction D1, and a plurality of second electrodes extending along a second direction D2 orthogonal to the first direction D1. Sensor electrode 42. Each of the sensor electrodes 41 and 42 may include line portions 41a and 42a extending linearly and bulging portions 41b and 42b bulging from the line portions 41a and 42a.
　取出配線４３は、対応するセンサ電極４１，４２によって検出された信号を端子部４４まで伝達するために非アクティブエリアＡａ２に設けられたものである。取出配線４３によって端子部４４まで伝達された信号は、端子部４４に取り付けられたフレキシブル基板（図示せず）などを介して検出制御部へ伝達される。 The lead-out wiring 43 is provided in the inactive area Aa2 in order to transmit the signals detected by the corresponding sensor electrodes 41 and 42 to the terminal portion 44. The signal transmitted to the terminal unit 44 by the extraction wiring 43 is transmitted to the detection control unit via a flexible substrate (not shown) attached to the terminal unit 44.
　（カバーガラス、タッチパネルセンサ部および加飾部の層構成）
　次に図３および図４を参照して、カバーガラス２０およびカバーガラス２０の第１面２０ａに設けられたタッチパネルセンサ部４０および第１加飾部６０の層構成について説明する。図３および図４はそれぞれ、図２に示すカバーガラス２０の線IIIおよび線IVに沿った断面図である。 (Layer structure of cover glass, touch panel sensor and decoration)
Next, with reference to FIG. 3 and FIG. 4, the layer structure of the touchscreen sensor part 40 and the 1st decoration part 60 provided in the 1st surface 20a of the cover glass 20 and the cover glass 20 is demonstrated. 3 and 4 are cross-sectional views taken along line III and line IV, respectively, of the cover glass 20 shown in FIG.
　はじめにカバーガラス２０のアクティブエリアＡａ１に配置される構成要素の層構成について説明する。図３および図４に示すように、タッチパネルセンサ部４０の第１ライン部４１ａ、第１膨出部４１ｂおよび第２膨出部４２ｂは、同一平面上に形成されたものであってもよい。この場合、酸化インジウムスズ（ＩＴＯ）などの透明導電性材料からなる透明導電層５１をパターニングすることによって、第１ライン部４１ａ、第１膨出部４１ｂおよび第２膨出部４２ｂを同時に形成することが可能である。第１ライン部４１ａおよび第２ライン部４２ａは、カバーガラス２０の法線方向から見た場合に互いに部分的に重なるよう形成されており、第１ライン部４１ａと第２ライン部４２ａとの間には絶縁層４７が介在されている。 First, the layer configuration of the components arranged in the active area Aa1 of the cover glass 20 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the first line portion 41 a, the first bulge portion 41 b, and the second bulge portion 42 b of the touch panel sensor unit 40 may be formed on the same plane. In this case, the first line portion 41a, the first bulging portion 41b, and the second bulging portion 42b are simultaneously formed by patterning the transparent conductive layer 51 made of a transparent conductive material such as indium tin oxide (ITO). It is possible. The first line portion 41a and the second line portion 42a are formed so as to partially overlap each other when viewed from the normal direction of the cover glass 20, and between the first line portion 41a and the second line portion 42a. Insulating layer 47 is interposed.
　次にカバーガラス２０の非アクティブエリアＡａ２に配置される構成要素の層構成について説明する。図３および図４に示すように、非アクティブエリアＡａ２には、第１加飾部６０が、上述の取出配線４３よりも観察者側に位置するよう配置されている。この場合、第１加飾部６０が、観察者側からカバーガラス２０を介して視認されることになる。すなわち、カバーガラス付き表示装置１０において、非アクティブエリアＡａ２の見え方は、第１加飾部６０およびその周辺の構成要素によって決定されることになる。 Next, the layer configuration of the components arranged in the inactive area Aa2 of the cover glass 20 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the first decorative portion 60 is arranged in the inactive area Aa <b> 2 so as to be positioned closer to the observer side than the above-described extraction wiring 43. In this case, the 1st decoration part 60 is visually recognized through the cover glass 20 from the observer side. That is, in the display device 10 with the cover glass, the appearance of the inactive area Aa2 is determined by the first decorating unit 60 and its surrounding components.
　第１加飾部６０の色は、カバーガラス付き表示装置１０に対して求められる意匠性に応じて選択される。例えば第１加飾部６０の色の例として、黒色、白色、水色、桃色、緑色などを挙げることができる。第１加飾部６０を構成する材料は、選択された色に応じて決定されるが、例えば白色が求められる場合、第１加飾部６０は、樹脂材料からなるバインダーと、バインダー内に分散された酸化チタンなどの着色顔料と、を含んでいる。バインダーとしては、例えば、アクリル樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、ポリウレタン樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂などの樹脂や、それらの樹脂の混合物が適宜用いられ得る。 The color of the 1st decorating part 60 is selected according to the design property calculated | required with respect to the display apparatus 10 with a cover glass. For example, black, white, light blue, pink, green, etc. can be mentioned as an example of the color of the 1st decorating part 60. Although the material which comprises the 1st decorating part 60 is determined according to the selected color, for example, when white is calculated | required, the 1st decorating part 60 is disperse | distributed in the binder which consists of a resin material, and a binder. And a colored pigment such as titanium oxide. As the binder, for example, a resin such as an acrylic resin, an epoxy resin, a polyurethane resin, a polyamide resin, or a mixture of these resins can be used as appropriate.
　ところで、カバーガラス２０の製造工程において、はじめに単位基材２２または後述する基材３０上に第１加飾部６０を設け、次に、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃに補強部２６を設ける場合、図３および図４に示すように、第１加飾部６０は、カバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃまでは、すなわち補強部２６の側面２６ｃまでは広がることができない。このため、第１加飾部６０による意匠上の効果が、カバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃにまでは、例えば補強部２６の部分にまでは及ばなくなる。この点を考慮し、図３および図４に示すように、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａ側または補強部２６の第１面２６ａ側であって第１加飾部６０の外側の位置に、第２加飾部６２を設けてもよい。第２加飾部６２は、所定の色を呈するよう構成されたものである。このような第２加飾部６２をさらに設けることによって、所望の色を呈することができる非アクティブエリアＡａ２の範囲をより外側に広げ、外周部からの光漏れの防止などの意匠性の向上を図ることができる。好ましくは、第２加飾部６２は、カバーガラス２０の第１面２０ａの法線方向に沿って見た場合に補強部２６と重なるよう構成されている。さらに好ましくは、第２加飾部６２は、カバーガラス２０の第１面２０ａの法線方向に沿って見た場合にカバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃにまで達するように構成されている。 By the way, in the manufacturing process of the cover glass 20, when providing the 1st decorating part 60 on the unit base material 22 or the base material 30 mentioned later first, and then providing the reinforcement part 26 in the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22, As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the first decorative portion 60 cannot spread to the side surface 20 c of the cover glass 20, that is, to the side surface 26 c of the reinforcing portion 26. For this reason, the design effect by the first decorative portion 60 does not reach the side surface 20 c of the cover glass 20, for example, the reinforcing portion 26. In consideration of this point, as shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4, the unit base 22 is located on the first surface 22 a side or the first surface 26 a side of the reinforcing portion 26 and outside the first decorating portion 60. The 2nd decoration part 62 may be provided. The 2nd decoration part 62 is comprised so that a predetermined color may be exhibited. By further providing such a second decorative portion 62, the range of the non-active area Aa2 that can exhibit a desired color is expanded to the outside, and design improvements such as prevention of light leakage from the outer peripheral portion are improved. Can be planned. Preferably, the 2nd decoration part 62 is comprised so that it may overlap with the reinforcement part 26, when it sees along the normal line direction of the 1st surface 20a of the cover glass 20. As shown in FIG. More preferably, the 2nd decoration part 62 is comprised so that it may reach even to the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20, when it sees along the normal line direction of the 1st surface 20a of the cover glass 20. As shown in FIG.
　第２加飾部６２が呈する色が特に限られることはなく、求められる意匠上の効果に応じて適宜設定される。例えば第２加飾部６２は、第１加飾部６０と同色を呈するよう、第１加飾部６０と同一の材料によって構成されていてもよく、若しくは、第１加飾部６０とは異なる色を呈するよう構成されていてもよい。第２加飾部６２を設ける方法としては、様々な公知の方法が採用され得るが、例えば、補強部２６を形成した後に、第２加飾部６２を構成する材料を含む塗布液をスクリーン印刷法などの印刷法によって補強部２６の第１面２６ａ上などに塗布する方法が採用される。印刷法が用いられる場合、塗布液を構成するための溶媒としては、例えばエーテル類、ケトン類、エステル類、アルコール類、多価アルコール類、芳香族炭化水素類等を用いることができる。また、塗布液の表面張力は、例えば２０～４０ｍＮ／ｍの範囲内に調整される。 The color which the 2nd decoration part 62 exhibits is not specifically limited, According to the effect on the design requested | required, it sets suitably. For example, the 2nd decoration part 62 may be comprised with the material same as the 1st decoration part 60 so that the 1st decoration part 60 may exhibit the same color, or is different from the 1st decoration part 60. It may be configured to exhibit a color. As a method of providing the second decorating part 62, various known methods can be adopted. For example, after the reinforcing part 26 is formed, a coating liquid containing a material constituting the second decorating part 62 is screen-printed. A method of coating the first surface 26a of the reinforcing portion 26 by a printing method such as a method is employed. When the printing method is used, examples of the solvent for constituting the coating liquid include ethers, ketones, esters, alcohols, polyhydric alcohols, aromatic hydrocarbons, and the like. Further, the surface tension of the coating solution is adjusted within a range of 20 to 40 mN / m, for example.
　次にカバーガラス２０の構成について説明する。図３および図４に示すように、カバーガラス２０は、単位基材２２および補強部２６を備えている。単位基材２２は、表示装置側の第１面２２ａ、第１面２２ａと反対側の第２面２２ｂ、および、第１面２２ａと第２面２２ｂとの間に広がる側面２２ｃ、を含んでいる。そして補強部２６は、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ上に設けられている。 Next, the configuration of the cover glass 20 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the cover glass 20 includes a unit base material 22 and a reinforcing portion 26. The unit base member 22 includes a first surface 22a on the display device side, a second surface 22b opposite to the first surface 22a, and a side surface 22c extending between the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b. Yes. The reinforcing portion 26 is provided on the side surface 22 c of the unit base material 22.
　後述するように、単位基材２２は、大型の強化ガラスからなる基材３０を分割して個片化することによって得られたものである。この単位基材２２は、図５に示すように、第１面２２ａおよび第２面２２ｂに形成された圧縮応力層２４ａと、第１面２２ａ側の圧縮応力層２４ａと第２面２２ｂ側の圧縮応力層２４ａとの間に位置する引張応力層２４ｂと、を含んでいる。圧縮応力層２４ａとは、圧縮応力が生じている層のことであり、引張応力層２４ｂとは、引張応力が生じている層のことである。これら圧縮応力層２４ａおよび引張応力層２４ｂを生じさせる方法としては、物理強化（風冷強化）や化学強化が知られている。例えば化学強化においては、歪点以下の温度で、ガラス中に含まれるアルカリイオンを、よりイオン半径の大きな他のアルカリイオンに交換するという化学的な処理が実施される。これによって、イオンが交換された表層付近に圧縮応力を発生させることができる。圧縮応力層２４ａを形成することにより、第１面２２ａまたは第２面２２ｂに何らかの衝撃が加えられ、これによって第１面２２ａまたは第２面２２ｂにクラックなどの傷が形成された場合であっても、傷が拡大することを防ぐことができる。このため、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａおよび第２面２２ｂは、衝撃に対する高い耐性を有している。単位基材２２を構成する材料としては、例えばアルミノシリケートガラスが用いられ得る。圧縮応力層２４ａの厚みは、一般には１０～１００μｍの範囲内になっている。 As will be described later, the unit base material 22 is obtained by dividing the base material 30 made of large tempered glass into individual pieces. As shown in FIG. 5, the unit base material 22 includes a compressive stress layer 24a formed on the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b, a compressive stress layer 24a on the first surface 22a side, and a second surface 22b side. And a tensile stress layer 24b located between the compressive stress layer 24a. The compressive stress layer 24a is a layer in which compressive stress is generated, and the tensile stress layer 24b is a layer in which tensile stress is generated. As a method for generating the compressive stress layer 24a and the tensile stress layer 24b, physical strengthening (wind cooling strengthening) and chemical strengthening are known. For example, in chemical strengthening, a chemical treatment is performed in which alkali ions contained in glass are exchanged with other alkali ions having a larger ionic radius at a temperature below the strain point. Thereby, compressive stress can be generated near the surface layer where the ions are exchanged. By forming the compressive stress layer 24a, some kind of impact is applied to the first surface 22a or the second surface 22b, and thereby a scratch such as a crack is formed on the first surface 22a or the second surface 22b. Even can prevent the wound from expanding. For this reason, the 1st surface 22a and the 2nd surface 22b of the unit base material 22 have the high tolerance with respect to an impact. As a material constituting the unit base member 22, for example, aluminosilicate glass can be used. The thickness of the compressive stress layer 24a is generally in the range of 10 to 100 μm.
　一方、図５に示すように、単位基材２２の引張応力層２４ｂは、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃにまで達している。すなわち単位基材２２の側面２２ｃでは引張応力層２４ｂが露出している。このため単位基材２２の側面２２ｃは、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａおよび第２面２２ｂと比較して、クラックなどの損傷に対して弱くなっている。上述の補強部２６は、このような単位基材２２の側面２２ｃを保護するために設けられたものである。 On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5, the tensile stress layer 24 b of the unit base material 22 reaches the side surface 22 c of the unit base material 22. That is, the tensile stress layer 24 b is exposed on the side surface 22 c of the unit base material 22. For this reason, the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 is weak against damage such as cracks, compared to the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base material 22. The reinforcing portion 26 described above is provided to protect the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 as described above.
　補強部２６を構成する材料としては例えば、加熱または紫外線照射などによって重合反応が進行し、これによって硬化する硬化性樹脂が用いられる。この場合、硬化前の成形時には補強部２６は所望の流動性を有しており、そして硬化後には補強部２６は所望の硬度や強度を有するようになる。このことにより、成形性と硬度や強度とを両立させることができる。 As a material constituting the reinforcing portion 26, for example, a curable resin that is cured by a polymerization reaction by heating or ultraviolet irradiation is used. In this case, the reinforcing part 26 has a desired fluidity at the time of molding before curing, and the reinforcing part 26 has a desired hardness and strength after curing. This makes it possible to achieve both formability, hardness and strength.
　ところで本実施の形態において、補強部２６は、大気などの外部環境に対して少なくとも部分的に露出するものである。このため、補強部２６が硬化する際の重合反応は、大気などの外部環境に対して補強部２６が露出した環境下で進行することになる。このため、アクリル系樹脂のように一般に高い反応性を有する樹脂材料を用いると、重合反応が酸素によって阻害され、この結果、重合反応が十分に進行できず、従って、十分な硬度を有する補強部２６を得ることができないと考えられる。
　また、エポキシ系樹脂のように過剰に高い硬度を有する樹脂材料を用いると、補強部２６が脆くなり、この結果、補強部２６に欠けなどが頻繁に現れるようになってしまうと考えられる。すなわち、補強部２６の靱性が低くなってしまうと考えられる。
　また上述のように、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃに補強部２６を設けた後に補強部２６上に第２加飾部６２を形成する場合、第２加飾部６２は、スクリーン印刷法などの印刷法などによって形成される。このため、第２加飾部６２が補強部２６上に安定に保持されるようにするためには、補強部２６が、第２加飾部６２を構成する材料に対する所定の濡れ性すなわち印刷適性を有していることが求められる。 By the way, in this Embodiment, the reinforcement part 26 is exposed at least partially with respect to external environments, such as air | atmosphere. For this reason, the polymerization reaction when the reinforcing portion 26 is cured proceeds in an environment where the reinforcing portion 26 is exposed to the external environment such as the atmosphere. For this reason, when a resin material having a high reactivity is generally used, such as an acrylic resin, the polymerization reaction is inhibited by oxygen, and as a result, the polymerization reaction cannot proceed sufficiently, and therefore the reinforcing portion having sufficient hardness. 26 cannot be obtained.
Further, if a resin material having an excessively high hardness such as an epoxy resin is used, it is considered that the reinforcing portion 26 becomes brittle, and as a result, defects or the like frequently appear in the reinforcing portion 26. That is, it is considered that the toughness of the reinforcing portion 26 is lowered.
Further, as described above, when the second decorative portion 62 is formed on the reinforcing portion 26 after the reinforcing portion 26 is provided on the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22, the second decorative portion 62 may be a screen printing method or the like. It is formed by a printing method or the like. For this reason, in order for the 2nd decoration part 62 to be stably hold | maintained on the reinforcement part 26, the reinforcement part 26 is predetermined wettability with respect to the material which comprises the 2nd decoration part 62, ie, printability. It is required to have.
　本件発明者らが鋭意実験を重ねた結果、後述する実施例によって支持されるように、補強部２６に含まれる樹脂材料として、ポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂、より好ましくはポリエン－ポリチオール系光硬化性樹脂が適していることを見出した。なおポリエン－ポリチオール系光硬化性樹脂とは、光照射に起因して重合反応が進行するよう構成されたポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂のことである。以下、ポリエン－ポリチオール系光硬化性樹脂の特徴について説明する。ポリエン－ポリチオール系光硬化性樹脂は、エン化合物、チオール化合物および光重合開始剤を含んでいる。このようなポリエン－ポリチオール系光硬化性樹脂は、アクリル系光硬化性樹脂に比べて酸素に起因する重合阻害を受けないという長所を有している。またポリエン－ポリチオール系光硬化性樹脂は、衝撃から単位基材２２を保護することができ、かつ脆くならない程度の適切な硬度を有している。例えば、適切な重合反応を経たポリエン－ポリチオール系光硬化性樹脂は、Ｄ５０～Ｄ７５の範囲内の硬度を有している。なお本願において、「適切な重合反応を経た」とは、樹脂材料を提供する材料メーカーが推奨する条件下で重合反応を実施したことを意味している。なお、硬度に関する上述の特徴は、光照射に起因して重合反応が進行するポリエン－ポリチオール系光硬化性樹脂に限られるものではなく、エン化合物およびチオール化合物を含むポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂全般に関して当てはまる特徴である。また、アクリル系光硬化性樹脂に比べて酸素に起因する重合阻害を受けないという特徴も、ポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂が光照射によって硬化する場合に限られるものではなく、電子線照射や加熱などのその他の要因によってポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂が硬化する場合にも当てはまる特徴である。すなわち、ポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂が、ポリエン－ポリチオール系電子線硬化性樹脂やポリエン－ポリチオール系熱硬化性樹脂として構成されていてもよい。
　ポリチオール系熱硬化性樹脂は例えば、エン化合物、チオール化合物およびα，α’アゾビスイソブチルニトリル（ＡＩＢＮ）等の熱重合開始剤を含んでいる。このようなポリチオール系熱硬化性樹脂を所定の熱硬化温度まで加熱することにより、例えば６０～１００℃以上に加熱することにより、ポリチオール系熱硬化性樹脂を硬化させることができる。 As a result of intensive experiments conducted by the present inventors, a polyene-polythiol-based resin, more preferably a polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resin, is used as the resin material contained in the reinforcing portion 26 as supported by the examples described later. Found that is suitable. The polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resin refers to a polyene-polythiol-based resin configured so that a polymerization reaction proceeds due to light irradiation. Hereinafter, the characteristics of the polyene-polythiol photocurable resin will be described. The polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resin contains an ene compound, a thiol compound, and a photopolymerization initiator. Such a polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resin has an advantage that it is not subjected to polymerization inhibition due to oxygen as compared with an acrylic photocurable resin. The polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resin can protect the unit base material 22 from an impact and has an appropriate hardness so as not to become brittle. For example, a polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resin that has undergone an appropriate polymerization reaction has a hardness in the range of D50 to D75. In the present application, “appropriately undergoing a polymerization reaction” means that the polymerization reaction was carried out under the conditions recommended by the material manufacturer providing the resin material. Note that the above-mentioned characteristics regarding hardness are not limited to polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resins in which a polymerization reaction proceeds due to light irradiation, but apply to polyene-polythiol-based resins in general including ene compounds and thiol compounds. It is a feature. In addition, the feature of not being subjected to polymerization inhibition due to oxygen as compared with acrylic photo-curable resin is not limited to the case where polyene-polythiol resin is cured by light irradiation, such as electron beam irradiation and heating. This is also the case when the polyene-polythiol resin is cured due to other factors. That is, the polyene-polythiol-based resin may be configured as a polyene-polythiol-based electron beam curable resin or a polyene-polythiol-based thermosetting resin.
The polythiol-based thermosetting resin contains, for example, an ene compound, a thiol compound, and a thermal polymerization initiator such as α, α ′ azobisisobutylnitrile (AIBN). By heating such a polythiol-based thermosetting resin to a predetermined thermosetting temperature, for example, by heating to 60 to 100 ° C. or more, the polythiol-based thermosetting resin can be cured.
　ポリエン－ポリチオール系光硬化性樹脂などのポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂におけるエン化合物およびチオール化合物の構成比率は、求められる特性に応じて適宜定められるが、例えばポリエン－ポリチオール系光硬化性樹脂などのポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂は、２０～８０重量％のエン化合物と、２０～８０重量％のチオール化合物と、を有している。エン化合物の重量％とチオール化合物の重量％との和が１００になっていてもよい。 The composition ratio of the ene compound and the thiol compound in the polyene-polythiol-based resin such as polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resin is appropriately determined according to the required characteristics. The polythiol-based resin has 20 to 80% by weight of ene compound and 20 to 80% by weight of thiol compound. The sum of the weight% of the ene compound and the weight% of the thiol compound may be 100.
　またポリエン－ポリチオール系光硬化性樹脂などのポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂は、アクリル系光硬化性樹脂などのアクリル系樹脂に比べて、硬化収縮が少ないという長所も有している。以下、本実施の形態によるカバーガラス２０と、硬化収縮との関係について説明する。 In addition, polyene-polythiol-based resins such as polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resins also have an advantage of less curing shrinkage than acrylic resins such as acrylic-based photocurable resins. Hereinafter, the relationship between the cover glass 20 according to the present embodiment and curing shrinkage will be described.
　後述するように、補強部２６は、塗布液２７を硬化させることにより形成される。このため、塗布液２７が硬化する際に大きな収縮が生じると、補強部２６の寸法の精度が低下してしまうことになる。また大きな収縮が生じると、補強部２６と単位基材２２との間の密着性も低下してしまう。また、単位基材２２の厚み方向（単位基材２２の第１面２２ａおよび第２面２２ｂの法線方向）において大きな収縮が生じると、補強部２６の面２６ａ，２６ｂと単位基材２２の面２２ａ，２２ｂとの間に大きな段差が生じ、この結果、補強部２６と単位基材２２と間の境界が観察者から視認され易くなってしまう。従って、補強部２６を構成する樹脂材料としては、硬化する際の収縮が可能な限り小さい材料が好ましい。本実施の形態によれば、ポリエン－ポリチオール系光硬化性樹脂などのポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂を用いて補強部２６を構成することにより、硬化する際に収縮が生じた場合であっても、単位基材２２の厚みが７００μｍである場合に補強部２６の面２６ａ，２６ｂと単位基材２２の面２２ａ，２２ｂとの間に生じる段差を例えば１～１０μｍの範囲内に抑制することができる。 As will be described later, the reinforcing portion 26 is formed by curing the coating liquid 27. For this reason, if a large shrinkage occurs when the coating liquid 27 is cured, the accuracy of the size of the reinforcing portion 26 is lowered. Moreover, when large shrinkage arises, the adhesiveness between the reinforcement part 26 and the unit base material 22 will also fall. Further, when large shrinkage occurs in the thickness direction of the unit base material 22 (the normal direction of the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base material 22), the surfaces 26a and 26b of the reinforcing portion 26 and the unit base material 22 A large step is generated between the surfaces 22a and 22b, and as a result, the boundary between the reinforcing portion 26 and the unit base member 22 is easily visually recognized by an observer. Therefore, the resin material constituting the reinforcing portion 26 is preferably a material that is as small as possible when shrinking when cured. According to the present embodiment, by configuring the reinforcing portion 26 using a polyene-polythiol-based resin such as a polyene-polythiol-based photocurable resin, even when shrinkage occurs during curing, the unit When the thickness of the base material 22 is 700 μm, a step generated between the surfaces 26 a and 26 b of the reinforcing portion 26 and the surfaces 22 a and 22 b of the unit base material 22 can be suppressed within a range of 1 to 10 μm, for example.
　なお後述するように、圧縮応力層２４ａの厚みは一般には１０～１００μｍの範囲内になっている。従って、硬化する際の収縮が小さい材料を選択し、これによって単位基材２２と補強部２６との段差をそれぞれ１～１０μｍの範囲内に抑制することは、収縮の程度が圧縮応力層２４ａの厚みよりも小さくなることを導く。このため、硬化する際に補強部２６が収縮したとしても、カバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃや後述する貫通孔２３の壁面２３ｃに引張応力層２４ｂが露出してしまうことを防ぐことができる。 As will be described later, the thickness of the compressive stress layer 24a is generally in the range of 10 to 100 μm. Therefore, selecting a material having a small shrinkage when cured and thereby suppressing the step between the unit base member 22 and the reinforcing portion 26 within a range of 1 to 10 μm respectively, the degree of shrinkage is that of the compressive stress layer 24a. It leads to become smaller than thickness. For this reason, even if the reinforcing portion 26 contracts during curing, it is possible to prevent the tensile stress layer 24b from being exposed on the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 or a wall surface 23c of a through hole 23 described later.
　以下、ポリエン－ポリチオール系光硬化性樹脂などのポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂の組成について詳細に説明する。 Hereinafter, the composition of a polyene-polythiol resin such as a polyene-polythiol photocurable resin will be described in detail.
　エン化合物は、１分子中に２個以上の炭素－炭素二重結合を有する多官能性の化合物であり、ビニルエーテル類、ビニルエステル類、アリルエーテル類、アリルアルコール誘導体、アリルイソシアヌル酸誘導体、スチレン類、アクリル酸誘導体、メタクルル酸誘導体、ジビニルベンゼン等が挙げられる。上記エン化合物の一部を、チオール化合物との反応性が高い順に並べると、ビニルエーテル類、ビニルエステル類、アリルエーテル類、アリルイソシアヌル酸誘導体、アクリル酸誘導体、スチレン類という順になる。
　チオール化合物は、１分子中に２個以上のチオール基を有する化合物であり、メルカプトカルボン酸と多価アルコールとのエステル類、脂肪族ポリチオール類及び芳香族ポリチオール類、その他ポリチオール類が挙げられる。これらの１種又は２種以上を用いることができる。
　上記メルカプトカルボン酸と多価アルコールとのエステル類におけるメルカプトカルボン酸としては、チオグリコール酸、α－メルカプトプロピオン酸及びβ－メルカプトプロピオン酸等が挙げられる。 An ene compound is a polyfunctional compound having two or more carbon-carbon double bonds in one molecule. Vinyl ethers, vinyl esters, allyl ethers, allyl alcohol derivatives, allyl isocyanuric acid derivatives, styrenes , Acrylic acid derivatives, methacrylic acid derivatives, divinylbenzene and the like. When a part of the above-mentioned ene compounds is arranged in the order of high reactivity with the thiol compound, the order becomes vinyl ethers, vinyl esters, allyl ethers, allyl isocyanuric acid derivatives, acrylic acid derivatives, and styrenes.
The thiol compound is a compound having two or more thiol groups in one molecule, and examples thereof include esters of mercaptocarboxylic acid and a polyhydric alcohol, aliphatic polythiols and aromatic polythiols, and other polythiols. These 1 type (s) or 2 or more types can be used.
Examples of the mercaptocarboxylic acid in the ester of mercaptocarboxylic acid and polyhydric alcohol include thioglycolic acid, α-mercaptopropionic acid and β-mercaptopropionic acid.
　上記エン化合物（ａ）及びチオール化合物（ｂ）の配合比は、エン化合物（ａ）の不飽和結合数とチオール化合物（ｂ）のチオール基数との比が、２：１～１：２となる範囲であることが好ましい。１：２を超えてチオール基が多量になると、未反応のチオール基が硬化反応後の組成物中に多量に残存するため、好ましくない、２：１よりもチオール基が少ないと、その効果である、高い密着性や、酸素に起因する重合阻害を受けないという長所が少なくなるという点で、好ましくない。 The blend ratio of the ene compound (a) and the thiol compound (b) is such that the ratio of the number of unsaturated bonds of the ene compound (a) to the number of thiol groups of the thiol compound (b) is 2: 1 to 1: 2. A range is preferable. When the amount of thiol groups exceeds 1: 2, a large amount of unreacted thiol groups remain in the composition after the curing reaction. It is not preferable from the viewpoint that there are few advantages such as high adhesion and no polymerization inhibition due to oxygen.
　光重合開始剤は、特に限定されず、公知の光重合開始剤を使用することができる。具体的には例えば、光重合開始剤としては、ラジカル重合性不飽和基を有する樹脂系の場合は、アセトフェノン類（例えば、商品名イルガキュア１８４（チバスペシャリティーケミカルズ社製）として市販されている１－ヒドロキシ－シクロヘキシル－フェニル－ケトン）、ベンゾフェノン類、チオキサントン類、プロピオフェノン類、ベンジル類、アシルホスフィンオキシド類、ベンゾイン、ベンゾインメチルエーテル等を単独又は混合して用いることができる。 The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited, and a known photopolymerization initiator can be used. Specifically, for example, as a photopolymerization initiator, in the case of a resin system having a radical polymerizable unsaturated group, it is commercially available as acetophenones (for example, trade name Irgacure 184 (manufactured by Ciba Specialty Chemicals) 1 -Hydroxy-cyclohexyl-phenyl-ketone), benzophenones, thioxanthones, propiophenones, benzyls, acylphosphine oxides, benzoin, benzoin methyl ether and the like can be used alone or in combination.
　上記光重合開始剤（ｃ）は、上記エン化合物（ａ）及びチオール化合物（ｂ）の合計量に対して、０．００１～１０質量％の割合で添加することが好ましい。０．００１質量％未満であると、光重合反応を充分に生じさせることができない、という問題を生じるおそれがある。また１０質量％を超えて添加しても、効果の向上がみられない。 The photopolymerization initiator (c) is preferably added in a proportion of 0.001 to 10% by mass with respect to the total amount of the ene compound (a) and the thiol compound (b). If it is less than 0.001% by mass, there may be a problem that the photopolymerization reaction cannot be sufficiently caused. Moreover, even if it adds exceeding 10 mass%, the improvement of an effect is not seen.
　次に図５を参照して、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃおよび補強部２６の形状についてより詳細に説明する。図５は、図３のカバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃを拡大して示す断面図である。 Next, the shape of the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 and the reinforcing portion 26 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 of FIG.
　はじめに補強部２６の形状について説明する。図５に示すように、補強部２６は、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａと同一平面上で第１面２２ａの端部２２ａｅの近傍から側方へ延びる第１面２６ａ、単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂと同一平面上で第２面２２ｂの端部２２ｂｅの近傍から側方へ延びる第２面２６ｂ、および、補強部２６の第１面２６ａと第２面２６ｂとの間に広がる側面２６ｃ、を含んでいる。以下、このような第１面２６ａおよび第２面２６ｂを含む補強部２６によってもたらされる利点について説明する。 First, the shape of the reinforcing portion 26 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the reinforcing portion 26 includes a first surface 26 a that extends from the vicinity of the end 22 ae of the first surface 22 a on the same plane as the first surface 22 a of the unit substrate 22, and the unit substrate 22. The second surface 22b extends from the vicinity of the end 22be of the second surface 22b to the side on the same plane as the second surface 22b and between the first surface 26a and the second surface 26b of the reinforcing portion 26. Side surface 26c. Hereinafter, an advantage provided by the reinforcing portion 26 including the first surface 26a and the second surface 26b will be described.
　はじめに比較のため、上述の特許文献２において考えられる課題について説明する。特許文献２のように基材の外周面を縁取ることによって基材の側面を補強する補強部を設ける場合、補強部の面と基材の面との間に段差が形成されることになる。従って、補強部と基材との間の境界において、光が散乱されることや、光の透過率および反射率が大きく変化することが生じやすくなる。この結果、補強部と基材との間の境界が観察者から視認され易くなってしまう。すなわち、カバーガラスの意匠性が低下してしまうことが考えられる。また、カバーガラスの補強部が外部に露出している場合、タッチパネルの操作感が段差によって阻害されてしまう。 First, for the sake of comparison, problems considered in the above-mentioned Patent Document 2 will be described. When providing a reinforcing portion that reinforces the side surface of the base material by trimming the outer peripheral surface of the base material as in Patent Document 2, a step is formed between the surface of the reinforcing portion and the surface of the base material. . Therefore, light is likely to be scattered at the boundary between the reinforcing portion and the base material, and the light transmittance and reflectance are likely to change greatly. As a result, the boundary between the reinforcing portion and the base material is easily visually recognized by the observer. That is, it is conceivable that the design properties of the cover glass deteriorate. Moreover, when the reinforcement part of a cover glass is exposed outside, the operation feeling of a touch panel will be inhibited by the level | step difference.
　これに対して本実施の形態によれば、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａと補強部２６の第１面２６ａとが同一平面上に位置している。同様に、単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂと補強部２６の第２面２６ｂとが同一平面上に位置している。すなわち、単位基材２２と補強部２６との間に段差が全くまたはほとんど存在していない。具体的には、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａおよび第２面２２ｂと補強部２６の第１面２６ａおよび第２面２６ｂとの間の段差がそれぞれ１０μｍ以下になっている。このため、単位基材２２と補強部２６との間の境界が観察者から視認されてしまうことを抑制することができる。従って本実施の形態の補強部２６によれば、カバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃの強度の確保と、カバーガラス２０の意匠性の確保とを両立させることができる。また、タッチパネルの操作感が段差によって阻害されてしまうこともない。また上述のように、圧縮応力層２４ａの厚みは一般には１０～１００μｍの範囲内になっている。従って、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａおよび第２面２２ｂと補強部２６の第１面２６ａおよび第２面２６ｂとの間の段差が１０μｍ以下である場合、すなわち段差が圧縮応力層２４ａの厚みよりも小さい場合、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃにおいて、単位基材２２の圧縮応力層２４ａと補強部２６とが少なくとも部分的に重なることになる。従って、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃに露出している引張応力層２４ｂを、補強部２６によって隙間無く覆うことができる。このため、カバーガラス２０の耐衝撃性をより確実に高くすることができる。 In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the first surface 22a of the unit base member 22 and the first surface 26a of the reinforcing portion 26 are located on the same plane. Similarly, the 2nd surface 22b of the unit base material 22 and the 2nd surface 26b of the reinforcement part 26 are located on the same plane. That is, there is no or almost no step between the unit base member 22 and the reinforcing portion 26. Specifically, the steps between the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 and the first surface 26a and the second surface 26b of the reinforcing portion 26 are each 10 μm or less. For this reason, it can suppress that the boundary between the unit base material 22 and the reinforcement part 26 is visually recognized by an observer. Therefore, according to the reinforcement part 26 of this Embodiment, ensuring of the intensity | strength of the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 and ensuring of the design property of the cover glass 20 can be made to make compatible. In addition, the operational feeling of the touch panel is not hindered by the steps. As described above, the thickness of the compressive stress layer 24a is generally in the range of 10 to 100 μm. Therefore, when the step between the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 and the first surface 26a and the second surface 26b of the reinforcing portion 26 is 10 μm or less, that is, the step is the compressive stress layer 24a. When the thickness is smaller than the thickness, the compressive stress layer 24a of the unit base material 22 and the reinforcing portion 26 overlap at least partially on the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22. Therefore, the tensile stress layer 24 b exposed on the side surface 22 c of the unit base material 22 can be covered with the reinforcing portion 26 without a gap. For this reason, the impact resistance of the cover glass 20 can be increased more reliably.
　好ましくは、補強部２６の第１面２６ａおよび第２面２６ｂはそれぞれ、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａおよび第２面２２ｂと同一平面上で少なくとも３００μｍにわたって端部２２ａｅおよび端部２２ｂｅから側方へ延びている。これによって、カバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃの強度と、カバーガラス２０の意匠性とをより確実に確保することができる。なお「同一平面上」とは、上述の段差の場合と同様に、補強部２６の第１面２６ａおよび第２面２６ｂのうち少なくとも３００μｍにわたって端部２２ａｅおよび端部２２ｂｅから側方へ延びている部分と、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａおよび第２面２２ｂとの間の、単位基材２２の厚み方向における間隔が、１０μｍ以下になっていることを意味している。 Preferably, the first surface 26a and the second surface 26b of the reinforcing portion 26 are respectively on the same plane as the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 from the end 22ae and the end 22be over at least 300 μm. It extends toward. Thereby, the intensity | strength of the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20, and the designability of the cover glass 20 can be ensured more reliably. Note that “on the same plane” extends from the end 22ae and the end 22be to the side over at least 300 μm of the first surface 26a and the second surface 26b of the reinforcing portion 26, as in the case of the above-described step. This means that the distance in the thickness direction of the unit base material 22 between the portion and the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base material 22 is 10 μm or less.
　次に補強部２６の側面２６ｃについて説明する。図５において、補強部２６の第１面２６ａの端部が符号２６ａｅで表されており、補強部２６の第２面２６ｂの端部が符号２６ｂｅで表されている。図５に示すように、側面２６ｃは、端部２６ａｅと端部２６ｂｅとの間をほぼ平坦に広がる平坦面として構成されている。そして、第１面２６ａと側面２６ｃとはほぼ直角に交わっており、同様に第２面２６ｂと側面２６ｃとはほぼ直角に交わっている。すなわち本実施の形態においては、図５の左右方向（第１面２６ａや第２面２６ｂが延びる方向）における端部２６ａｅの位置と端部２６ｂｅの位置とが一致している。 Next, the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 will be described. In FIG. 5, the end portion of the first surface 26a of the reinforcing portion 26 is represented by reference numeral 26ae, and the end portion of the second surface 26b of the reinforcing portion 26 is represented by reference numeral 26be. As shown in FIG. 5, the side surface 26 c is configured as a flat surface that extends substantially flat between the end portion 26 ae and the end portion 26 be. The first surface 26a and the side surface 26c intersect at a substantially right angle, and similarly, the second surface 26b and the side surface 26c intersect at a substantially right angle. That is, in the present embodiment, the position of the end portion 26ae and the position of the end portion 26be in the left-right direction in FIG. 5 (the direction in which the first surface 26a and the second surface 26b extend) match.
　次に、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃの形状について説明する。図５に示すように、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃは、第１側面２２ｄおよび第２側面２２ｅを含んでいる。第１側面２２ｄは、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａの端部２２ａｅに交わるとともに、単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂ側へ向かうにつれて外側へ広がっている。また第２側面２２ｅは、単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂの端部２２ｂｅに交わるとともに、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａ側へ向かうにつれて外側へ広がり、そして第１側面２２ｄに合流している。このため、第１側面２２ｄと第２側面２２ｅとの合流部分が外側に突出することになる。この場合、補強部２６が単位基材２２の側面２２ｃを挟み込む形になるため、補強部２６を単位基材２２の側面２２ｃに強固に密着させることができる。
　このような形状を有する第１側面２２ｄおよび第２側面２２ｅは、例えば後述するように、基材３０を分割して単位基材２２を得る際に、基材３０の第１面側および第２面側の両方から基材３０をウェットエッチングすることによって形成される。 Next, the shape of the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 includes a first side surface 22d and a second side surface 22e. The first side surface 22d intersects the end 22ae of the first surface 22a of the unit base material 22, and spreads outward as it goes to the second surface 22b side of the unit base material 22. Further, the second side surface 22e intersects the end 22be of the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22, expands outward toward the first surface 22a side of the unit base member 22, and joins the first side surface 22d. Yes. For this reason, the confluence | merging part of 22 d of 1st side surfaces and the 2nd side surface 22e will protrude outside. In this case, since the reinforcing portion 26 sandwiches the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22, the reinforcing portion 26 can be firmly adhered to the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22.
The first side surface 22d and the second side surface 22e having such a shape, for example, when the base material 30 is divided and the unit base material 22 is obtained by dividing the base material 30, as described later, are provided. The substrate 30 is formed by wet etching from both sides.
　（カバーガラスの寸法）
　次にカバーガラス２０の寸法について説明する。はじめに、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ上に設けられた補強部２６の被覆寸法について説明する。ここで被覆寸法とは、補強部２６の側面２６ｃの法線方向に沿った方向における補強部２６の長さのことである。補強部２６の側面２６ｃの法線方向は、図５における左右方向に平行である。 (Dimension of cover glass)
Next, the dimensions of the cover glass 20 will be described. First, the covering dimension of the reinforcing portion 26 provided on the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 will be described. Here, the covering dimension is the length of the reinforcing portion 26 in the direction along the normal direction of the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26. The normal direction of the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 is parallel to the left-right direction in FIG.
　図５において、補強部２６の被覆寸法の最小値が符号Ｔｍｉｎで表されている。なお本実施の形態においては、上述のように、単位基材２２の第１側面２２ｄは、第２面２２ｂ側へ向かうにつれて外側へ広がっている。また単位基材２２の第２側面２２ｅは、第１面２２ａ側へ向かうにつれて外側へ広がっている。また上述のように、補強部２６の側面２６ｃは、第１面２６ａおよび第２面２６ｂに直角に交わる平坦面となっている。このため図５に示すように、第１側面２２ｄと第２側面２２ｅとが合流する位置において、補強部２６の被覆寸法が最小値Ｔｍｉｎになる。 In FIG. 5, the minimum value of the covering dimension of the reinforcing portion 26 is represented by the symbol Tmin. In the present embodiment, as described above, the first side surface 22d of the unit base member 22 spreads outward toward the second surface 22b side. Moreover, the 2nd side 22e of the unit base material 22 has spread outside as it goes to the 1st surface 22a side. As described above, the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 is a flat surface that intersects the first surface 26a and the second surface 26b at a right angle. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 5, at the position where the first side surface 22d and the second side surface 22e merge, the covering dimension of the reinforcing portion 26 becomes the minimum value Tmin.
　補強部２６の被覆寸法の最小値Ｔｍｉｎは、カバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃなどに衝撃が加えられた場合であっても単位基材２２の側面２２ｃを保護することができるよう、適切に設定されている。例えば補強部２６の被覆寸法の最小値Ｔｍｉｎは、２０μｍ以上に設定されている。 The minimum value Tmin of the covering dimension of the reinforcing portion 26 is appropriately set so that the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 can be protected even when an impact is applied to the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 or the like. Yes. For example, the minimum value Tmin of the covering dimension of the reinforcing portion 26 is set to 20 μm or more.
　また本実施の形態においては、第１面２６ａの位置または第２面２６ｂの位置において、補強部２６の被覆寸法が最大値になる。ところで補強部２６の被覆寸法の最大値が大きくなりすぎると、カバーガラス２０に衝撃が加えられた場合に補強部２６が単位基材２２から剥離しやすくなることが考えられる。また、カバーガラス２０におけるガラスの割合が減少し、樹脂の割合が増加するので、カバーガラス２０の強度が低下することも考えられる。この点を考慮し、補強部２６の被覆寸法の最大値は、被覆が最も薄い部分（図５において符号Ｔｍｉｎで表されている部分）では２５０μｍ以下に設定され、被覆が最も厚い部分（図５において符号Ｔｍａｘで表されている部分）では５００μｍ以下に設定されることが好ましい。 In the present embodiment, the covering dimension of the reinforcing portion 26 is the maximum value at the position of the first surface 26a or the position of the second surface 26b. By the way, if the maximum value of the covering dimension of the reinforcing portion 26 becomes too large, it is considered that the reinforcing portion 26 is easily peeled off from the unit base material 22 when an impact is applied to the cover glass 20. Moreover, since the ratio of the glass in the cover glass 20 reduces and the ratio of resin increases, it is also considered that the intensity | strength of the cover glass 20 falls. In consideration of this point, the maximum value of the coating size of the reinforcing portion 26 is set to 250 μm or less in the thinnest portion (the portion represented by the symbol Tmin in FIG. 5), and the thickest portion (see FIG. 5). In the portion represented by the symbol Tmax), it is preferably set to 500 μm or less.
　一例としては、図５に示す例において、被覆が最も薄い部分における補強部２６の被覆寸法Ｔｍｉｎを１００μｍに設定し、被覆が最も厚い部分における補強部２６の被覆寸法Ｔｍａｘを３００μｍに設定することが考えられる。 As an example, in the example shown in FIG. 5, the covering dimension Tmin of the reinforcing part 26 in the thinnest part is set to 100 μm, and the covering dimension Tmax of the reinforcing part 26 in the thickest part is set to 300 μm. Conceivable.
　カバーガラス２０の厚み（すなわち単位基材２２の厚みおよび補強部２６の厚み）は、求められる強度や、カバーガラス２０の面積などに応じて適切に設定されるが、例えば０．１ｍｍ～１ｍｍの範囲内になっている。 The thickness of the cover glass 20 (that is, the thickness of the unit base material 22 and the thickness of the reinforcing portion 26) is appropriately set according to the required strength, the area of the cover glass 20, and the like. It is within range.
　（カバーガラスの製造方法）
　次に、以上のような構成からなるカバーガラス２０を製造する方法について、図６Ａ～図７Ｄを参照して説明する。 (Method for manufacturing cover glass)
Next, a method for manufacturing the cover glass 20 having the above configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 6A to 7D.
　はじめに図６Ａ～図６Ｅ（ａ）（ｂ）を参照して、大型の強化ガラスからなる基材３０を用いて、単位基材２２および保護膜８１，８２を有する単位積層体３５を形成する工程について説明する。なお図６Ａ、図６Ｂ（ａ）、図６Ｃ、図６Ｄ（ａ）および図６Ｅ（ａ）は、本工程における基材３０を示す断面図である。また図６Ｅ（ｂ）は、図６Ｅ（ａ）に示す単位積層体３５を拡大して示す断面図である。また図６Ｂ（ｂ）および図６Ｄ（ｂ）は、本工程における基材３０を示す平面図である。 First, referring to FIGS. 6A to 6E (a) and 6 (b), a process of forming a unit laminate 35 having a unit substrate 22 and protective films 81 and 82 using a substrate 30 made of large tempered glass. Will be described. 6A, 6B (a), FIG. 6C, FIG. 6D (a), and FIG. 6E (a) are cross-sectional views showing the substrate 30 in this step. FIG. 6E (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the unit laminate body 35 shown in FIG. 6E (a). 6B (b) and 6D (b) are plan views showing the base material 30 in this step.
　まず図６Ａに示すように、大型の強化ガラスからなる基材３０を準備する。基材３０は、第１面３０ａ、第１面３０ａの反対側にある第２面３０ｂ、および、第１面３０ａと第２面３０ｂとの間に広がる側面３０ｃ、を含んでいる。図６Ａに示すように、基材３０の第１面３０ａ、第２面３０ｂおよび側面３０ｃには圧縮応力層２４ａが形成されており、そして圧縮応力層２４ａの内側には引張応力層２４ｂが存在している。このように基材３０の表面は全て圧縮応力層２４ａによって形成されている。 First, as shown in FIG. 6A, a base material 30 made of large tempered glass is prepared. The base material 30 includes a first surface 30a, a second surface 30b on the opposite side of the first surface 30a, and a side surface 30c extending between the first surface 30a and the second surface 30b. As shown in FIG. 6A, a compressive stress layer 24a is formed on the first surface 30a, the second surface 30b, and the side surface 30c of the base material 30, and a tensile stress layer 24b exists inside the compressive stress layer 24a. is doing. Thus, the entire surface of the base material 30 is formed by the compressive stress layer 24a.
　次に図６Ｂ（ａ）（ｂ）に示すように、基材３０の第１面３０ａ上において、所定の複数の区画に第１加飾部６０およびタッチパネルセンサ部４０を形成する（要素部形成工程）。例えば図６Ｂ（ｂ）においては、基材３０の第１面３０ａを紙面の上下方向で２行に区画し紙面の左右方向で３列に区画することによって得られる６区画のそれぞれに、第１加飾部６０およびタッチパネルセンサ部４０が形成される。なお基材３０の区画数が特に限られることはない。第１面３０ａ側に第１加飾部６０およびタッチパネルセンサ部４０を形成する方法としては、公知の方法が適宜用いられ、例えばフォトリソグラフィー法が用いられる。なお以下の説明において、タッチパネルセンサ部４０および第１加飾部６０を要素部７０と総称することもある。 Next, as shown to FIG. 6B (a) (b), on the 1st surface 30a of the base material 30, the 1st decorating part 60 and the touchscreen sensor part 40 are formed in a predetermined some division (element part formation) Process). For example, in FIG. 6B (b), the first surface 30a of the base material 30 is divided into two rows in the vertical direction of the paper surface and divided into three columns in the horizontal direction of the paper surface. The decoration part 60 and the touch panel sensor part 40 are formed. The number of sections of the base material 30 is not particularly limited. As a method of forming the first decorating unit 60 and the touch panel sensor unit 40 on the first surface 30a side, a known method is appropriately used, and for example, a photolithography method is used. In the following description, the touch panel sensor unit 40 and the first decoration unit 60 may be collectively referred to as an element unit 70.
　その後、基材３０の第１面３０ａ上および第２面３０ｂ上において所定の複数の区画に第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２を設ける保護膜形成工程を実施する。まず図６Ｃに示すように、基材３０の第１面３０ａ上に、複数の区画にそれぞれ設けられた要素部７０を連続的に覆う第１保護膜８１を設ける。また基材３０の第２面３０ｂ上に第２保護膜８２を設ける。図６Ｃに示す例において、第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２はそれぞれ、基材３０の第１面３０ａおよび第２面３０ｂの全域を覆うよう設けられている。 Thereafter, a protective film forming step of providing the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 in a predetermined plurality of sections on the first surface 30a and the second surface 30b of the base material 30 is performed. First, as shown in FIG. 6C, a first protective film 81 is provided on the first surface 30a of the substrate 30 to continuously cover the element portions 70 respectively provided in the plurality of sections. A second protective film 82 is provided on the second surface 30 b of the substrate 30. In the example shown in FIG. 6C, the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 are provided so as to cover the entire area of the first surface 30a and the second surface 30b of the substrate 30, respectively.
　保護膜８１，８２は、フッ酸などを用いた後述するウェットエッチングによって基材３０を分割する際に要素部７０を保護するレジストとして機能するものである。基材３０を分割するために用いられるエッチング液に対する耐性を有する限りにおいて、保護膜８１，８２を構成する材料が特に限られることはない。例えば保護膜８１，８２を構成する材料として、５０～１００μｍ程度の厚みを有する二軸延伸ポリプロピレンや無延伸ポリプロピレンなどを用いることができる。この場合、２０μｍ程度の厚みを有する粘着層を介して二軸延伸ポリプロピレンや無延伸ポリプロピレンのシートを基材３０の第１面３０ａ上および第２面３０ｂ上に貼り付けることにより、保護膜８１，８２が構成される。 The protective films 81 and 82 function as a resist that protects the element portion 70 when the substrate 30 is divided by wet etching, which will be described later, using hydrofluoric acid or the like. As long as it has the tolerance with respect to the etching liquid used in order to divide the base material 30, the material which comprises the protective films 81 and 82 is not specifically limited. For example, biaxially stretched polypropylene or unstretched polypropylene having a thickness of about 50 to 100 μm can be used as a material for forming the protective films 81 and 82. In this case, by attaching a biaxially stretched polypropylene sheet or an unstretched polypropylene sheet on the first surface 30a and the second surface 30b of the substrate 30 through an adhesive layer having a thickness of about 20 μm, the protective film 81, 82 is configured.
　その後、図６Ｄ（ａ）（ｂ）に示すように、第１面３０ａおよび第２面３０ｂの全域にわたって設けられていた第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２を、第１面３０ａおよび第２面３０ｂの区画毎に分断する。これによって、各要素部７０を覆う第１保護膜８１、およびそれに対応する第２保護膜８２に、各区画の境界に沿った間隙が形成される。 Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 6D (a) and 6 (b), the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 provided over the entire area of the first surface 30a and the second surface 30b are replaced with the first surface 30a and the second protective film 82, respectively. Dividing into sections of the two surfaces 30b. As a result, a gap is formed along the boundary of each partition in the first protective film 81 covering each element portion 70 and the corresponding second protective film 82.
　第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２を分断する具体的な方法が特に限られることはなく、様々な方法が採用され得る。例えば、図６Ｄ（ｂ）に示す第１保護膜８１の形状に対応した形状を有する金型を用いて、第１保護膜８１の不要部分（間隙になる部分）を除去してもよい。第２面３０ｂ側においても、第１保護膜８１用の金型に対応した形状を有する金型を用いることにより、第２保護膜８２の不要部分（間隙になる部分）が除去され得る。その他にも、レーザー加工を利用して、第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２の不要部分を除去してもよい。 The specific method for dividing the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 is not particularly limited, and various methods can be adopted. For example, unnecessary portions (portions that become gaps) of the first protective film 81 may be removed using a mold having a shape corresponding to the shape of the first protective film 81 shown in FIG. 6D (b). Also on the second surface 30b side, by using a mold having a shape corresponding to the mold for the first protective film 81, unnecessary portions (portions that become gaps) of the second protective film 82 can be removed. In addition, unnecessary portions of the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 may be removed using laser processing.
　その後、図６Ｅ（ａ）に示すように、基材３０の各区画に設けられた第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２の間隙に沿って基材３０を切断する切断工程を実施する。具体的には、基材３０の第１面３０ａ側および第２面３０ｂ側から、第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２をレジストとして基材３０をウェットエッチングすることによって、基材３０を切断する。エッチング液としては、上述のようにフッ酸などが用いられる。これによって、図６Ｅ（ａ）に示すように、ガラスからなる単位基材２２と、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａ側に設けられた要素部７０と、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａ上に設けられ、要素部７０を覆う第１保護膜８１と、単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂ上に設けられた第２保護膜８２と、を有する単位積層体３５を得ることができる。 Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 6E (a), a cutting step of cutting the base material 30 along the gap between the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 provided in each section of the base material 30 is performed. Specifically, the base material 30 is wet-etched from the first surface 30a side and the second surface 30b side of the base material 30 by using the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 as resists, thereby removing the base material 30. Disconnect. As the etching solution, hydrofluoric acid or the like is used as described above. As a result, as shown in FIG. 6E (a), the unit base 22 made of glass, the element part 70 provided on the first surface 22a side of the unit base 22, and the first surface 22a of the unit base 22 The unit laminated body 35 having the first protective film 81 provided on the element portion 70 and the second protective film 82 provided on the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 can be obtained.
　図６Ｅ（ｂ）は、図６Ｅ（ａ）に示す単位積層体３５を拡大して示す断面図である。図６Ｅ（ｂ）に示すように、第１保護膜８１は、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａよりも側方に突出するよう構成されている。同様に第２保護膜８２は、単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂよりも側方に突出するよう構成されている。単位基材２２と第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２との間のこのような関係は、エッチング液を用いた上述の切断工程の際に、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａおよび第２面２２ｂ双方からのエッチングにより単位基材２２が貫通される程度の時間にわたってエッチング工程を継続することによって実現される。なおエッチング工程においては通常、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃのうち第１面２２ａおよび第２面２２ｂ近傍の位置において深さ方向および水平方向のいずれにおいても等方的にエッチングが進む。このため図６Ｅ（ｂ）に示すように、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃのうち第１面２２ａおよび第２面２２ｂ近傍においては、第１面２２ａと第２面２２ｂとの間の中間部分に比べて、エッチングが深く進む。この結果、端部２２ａｅに交わるとともに第２面２２ｂ側へ向かうにつれて外側へ広がる第１側面２２ｄと、端部２２ｂｅに交わるとともに第１面２２ａ側へ向かうにつれて外側へ広がる第２側面２２ｅと、が得られる。 FIG. 6E (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the unit laminate body 35 shown in FIG. 6E (a). As shown in FIG. 6E (b), the first protective film 81 is configured to protrude laterally from the first surface 22a of the unit base member 22. Similarly, the second protective film 82 is configured to protrude from the second surface 22 b of the unit base member 22 to the side. Such a relationship between the unit base material 22 and the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 is based on the fact that the first surface 22a of the unit base material 22 and the first surface 22a of the unit base material 22 and This is realized by continuing the etching process for a time that allows the unit base material 22 to be penetrated by etching from both of the two surfaces 22b. In the etching step, etching proceeds isotropically in both the depth direction and the horizontal direction at a position in the vicinity of the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 in general. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 6E (b), in the vicinity of the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22, an intermediate portion between the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b is provided. In comparison, the etching proceeds deeper. As a result, the first side surface 22d that intersects the end portion 22ae and expands outward as it goes to the second surface 22b side, and the second side surface 22e that intersects the end portion 22be and extends outward toward the first surface 22a side, can get.
　次に図７Ａ～図７Ｄを参照して、単位積層体３５の単位基材２２の側面２２ｃに補強部（樹脂等）を設けることによって、側面が補強されたカバーガラス２０を得るための工程について説明する。 Next, referring to FIGS. 7A to 7D, a process for obtaining a cover glass 20 whose side surfaces are reinforced by providing reinforcing portions (resin etc.) on the side surfaces 22c of the unit base material 22 of the unit laminate body 35 will be described. explain.
　はじめに図７Ａに示すように、紫外線硬化樹脂または熱硬化樹脂などの硬化性材料を含む塗布液２７を単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ上に塗布する塗布工程を実施する。ここでは、アクリル系樹脂と、光重合開始剤とを含む塗布液が用いられる場合について説明する。
　塗布工程において、塗布液２７は図７Ａに示すように、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ、第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２によって囲われた空間内に充填される。なお塗布液２７は、図７Ａに示すように、第１保護膜８１の端面８１ｃ上および第２保護膜８２の端面８２ｃ上にも溢れ出る程度に塗布されてもよい。 First, as shown in FIG. 7A, an application step of applying an application liquid 27 containing a curable material such as an ultraviolet curable resin or a thermosetting resin onto the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 is performed. Here, the case where the coating liquid containing acrylic resin and a photoinitiator is used is demonstrated.
In the coating process, the coating liquid 27 is filled in a space surrounded by the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22, the first protective film 81, and the second protective film 82, as shown in FIG. 7A. As shown in FIG. 7A, the coating liquid 27 may be applied to the extent that it overflows also onto the end surface 81c of the first protective film 81 and the end surface 82c of the second protective film 82.
　次に、第１保護膜８１の端面８１ｃ上および第２保護膜８２の端面８２ｃ上に溢れ出ている塗布液２７を、スキージなどを用いて掻きとる。これによって図７Ｂに示すように、塗布液２７の表面が、第１保護膜８１の端面８１ｃおよび第２保護膜８２の端面８２ｃに一致するようになる。すなわち、塗布液２７の第１保護膜８１側の液面の端部の位置が、第１保護膜８１の端面８１ｃの位置に一致し、塗布液２７の第２保護膜８２側の液面の端部の位置が、第２保護膜８２の端面８２ｃの位置に一致するようになる。 Next, the coating liquid 27 overflowing on the end surface 81c of the first protective film 81 and the end surface 82c of the second protective film 82 is scraped off using a squeegee or the like. As a result, as shown in FIG. 7B, the surface of the coating liquid 27 coincides with the end surface 81 c of the first protective film 81 and the end surface 82 c of the second protective film 82. That is, the position of the end of the liquid surface of the coating liquid 27 on the first protective film 81 side coincides with the position of the end surface 81c of the first protective film 81, and the liquid surface of the coating liquid 27 on the second protective film 82 side. The position of the end portion coincides with the position of the end surface 82 c of the second protective film 82.
　その後、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ上に設けられた塗布液２７を硬化させる硬化工程を実施する。ここでは、塗布液２７に紫外線などの光を照射することによって、塗布液２７を硬化させる。これによって、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ上に補強部２６が形成される。 Thereafter, a curing step of curing the coating liquid 27 provided on the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 is performed. Here, the coating liquid 27 is cured by irradiating the coating liquid 27 with light such as ultraviolet rays. Thereby, the reinforcing part 26 is formed on the side surface 22 c of the unit base material 22.
　次に、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａ上の第１保護膜８１および単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂ上の第２保護膜８２を除去する。これによって、図７Ｃに示すように、単位基材２２と、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ上に設けられた補強部２６と、を備えたカバーガラス２０を得ることができる。その後、図７Ｄに示すように、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａ側または補強部２６の第１面２６ａ側であって第１加飾部６０の外側の位置に第２加飾部６２を設けてもよい。第２加飾部６２は例えば、第１加飾部６０と同色を呈するよう構成されている。このような第２加飾部６２をさらに設けることによって、所望の色を呈することができる非アクティブエリアＡａ２の範囲をより外側に広げ、外周部からの光漏れの防止などの意匠性の向上を図ることができる。また第２加飾部６２は、カバーガラス２０の第１面２０ａの法線方向に沿って見た場合に補強部２６と重なるよう構成されていることが好ましい。 Next, the first protective film 81 on the first surface 22a of the unit substrate 22 and the second protective film 82 on the second surface 22b of the unit substrate 22 are removed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 7C, a cover glass 20 including the unit base material 22 and the reinforcing portion 26 provided on the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 can be obtained. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 7D, the second decorative portion 62 is placed at a position on the first surface 22 a side of the unit base member 22 or the first surface 26 a side of the reinforcing portion 26 and outside the first decorative portion 60. It may be provided. The 2nd decorating part 62 is comprised so that the 1st decorating part 60 and the same color may be exhibited, for example. By further providing such a second decorative portion 62, the range of the non-active area Aa2 that can exhibit a desired color is expanded to the outside, and design improvements such as prevention of light leakage from the outer peripheral portion are improved. Can be planned. Moreover, it is preferable that the 2nd decorating part 62 is comprised so that it may overlap with the reinforcement part 26, when it sees along the normal line direction of the 1st surface 20a of the cover glass 20. FIG.
　本実施の形態によれば、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ上に、硬化性樹脂からなる補強部２６が設けられている。このため、カバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃに衝撃が加えられた場合に単位基材２２の側面２２ｃに伝わる力が、補強部２６によって緩和され、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃにクラックなどの損傷が生じることを抑制することができる。このことにより、仮に単位基材２２の側面２２ｃに圧縮応力層が形成されていない場合であっても、カバーガラス２０の耐衝撃性を十分に高くすることができる。また、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃに引張応力層２４ｂが露出している場合であっても、露出している引張応力層２４ｂを補強部２６によって覆うことができるので、カバーガラス２０の耐衝撃性を十分に高くすることができる。 According to the present embodiment, the reinforcing portion 26 made of a curable resin is provided on the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22. For this reason, when an impact is applied to the side surface 20 c of the cover glass 20, the force transmitted to the side surface 22 c of the unit base material 22 is alleviated by the reinforcing portion 26, and damage such as cracks occurs on the side surface 22 c of the unit base material 22. This can be suppressed. Thereby, even if the compressive stress layer is not formed on the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22, the impact resistance of the cover glass 20 can be sufficiently increased. Further, even if the tensile stress layer 24b is exposed on the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22, the exposed tensile stress layer 24b can be covered with the reinforcing portion 26, so that the impact resistance of the cover glass 20 is increased. Sex can be made high enough.
　また本実施の形態によれば、補強部２６を構成する樹脂材料が、ポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂を含んでいる。このため、補強部２６が大気などの外部環境に対して露出している場合であっても、重合反応が酸素によって阻害されてしまうことを抑制することができる。これによって、十分に重合反応を経た、所望の硬度を有する補強部２６を得ることができる。またポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂を用いることにより、補強部２６の硬度が過剰に高くなってしまうことを防ぐことができる。従って、硬度と靱性とのバランスが良好に保たれた補強部２６を得ることができる。またポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂を用いることにより、補強部２６の表面の濡れ性を適切に確保することができる。このため、補強部２６が形成された後に補強部２６の第１面２６ａ上に塗布される塗布液、例えば第２加飾部６２用の塗布液が、第１面２６ａ上に安定に留まることができる。すなわち、補強部２６の第１面２６ａの印刷適性を十分に確保することができる。このことにより、第２加飾部６２などの構成要素を補強部２６の第１面２６ａ上に均一に形成することが可能になる。 Further, according to the present embodiment, the resin material constituting the reinforcing portion 26 includes a polyene-polythiol resin. For this reason, even if it is a case where the reinforcement part 26 is exposed with respect to external environments, such as air | atmosphere, it can suppress that a polymerization reaction will be inhibited by oxygen. As a result, it is possible to obtain a reinforcing portion 26 having a desired hardness that has undergone a sufficient polymerization reaction. Further, by using the polyene-polythiol resin, it is possible to prevent the hardness of the reinforcing portion 26 from becoming excessively high. Therefore, it is possible to obtain the reinforcing portion 26 in which the balance between hardness and toughness is kept good. Further, by using a polyene-polythiol resin, the wettability of the surface of the reinforcing portion 26 can be appropriately ensured. For this reason, the coating liquid applied on the first surface 26a of the reinforcing part 26 after the reinforcing part 26 is formed, for example, the coating liquid for the second decorating part 62 remains stably on the first surface 26a. Can do. That is, the printability of the first surface 26a of the reinforcing portion 26 can be sufficiently ensured. This makes it possible to uniformly form components such as the second decorative portion 62 on the first surface 26 a of the reinforcing portion 26.
　また本実施の形態において、補強部２６は上述のように、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａから側方に突出した第１保護膜８１および単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂから側方に突出した第２保護膜８２によって位置決めされた空間内に形成されたものである。このため図７Ｃおよび図７Ｄに示すように、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａと補強部２６の第１面２６ａとは同一平面上に位置している。同様に、単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂと２６の第２面２６ｂとは同一平面上に位置している。すなわち、単位基材２２と補強部２６との間に段差が全くまたはほとんど存在していない。このため、単位基材２２と補強部２６との間の境界が観察者から視認されてしまうことを抑制することができる。従って本実施の形態の補強部２６によれば、カバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃの強度の確保と、カバーガラス２０の意匠性の確保とを両立させることができる。また、指などの外部導体をカバーガラス２０上でスライドさせる際に、単位基材２２と補強部２６との間の境界で外部導体が引っ掛かりを感じてしまうことを抑制することができる。従って、タッチパネルの操作感が段差によって阻害されてしまうことを抑制することができる。また、段差によって指などの外部導体が傷ついてしまうことを抑制することができる。 Moreover, in this Embodiment, the reinforcement part 26 is laterally protruded from the 1st protective film 81 and the 2nd surface 22b of the unit base material 22 which protruded from the 1st surface 22a of the unit base material 22 as mentioned above. It is formed in a space positioned by the protruding second protective film 82. For this reason, as shown to FIG. 7C and FIG. 7D, the 1st surface 22a of the unit base material 22 and the 1st surface 26a of the reinforcement part 26 are located on the same plane. Similarly, the 2nd surface 22b of the unit base material 22 and the 2nd surface 26b of 26 are located on the same plane. That is, there is no or almost no step between the unit base member 22 and the reinforcing portion 26. For this reason, it can suppress that the boundary between the unit base material 22 and the reinforcement part 26 is visually recognized by an observer. Therefore, according to the reinforcement part 26 of this Embodiment, ensuring of the intensity | strength of the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 and ensuring of the design property of the cover glass 20 can be made to make compatible. Further, when the external conductor such as a finger is slid on the cover glass 20, it is possible to suppress the external conductor from being caught at the boundary between the unit base material 22 and the reinforcing portion 26. Therefore, it can suppress that the operation feeling of a touchscreen is inhibited by the level | step difference. Moreover, it can suppress that external conductors, such as a finger | toe, are damaged by the level | step difference.
　また本実施の形態において、補強部２６においては上述のように、第１保護膜８１の端面８１ｃ上および第２保護膜８２の端面８２ｃ上に溢れ出ている塗布液２７を、スキージなどを用いて掻きとることによって、補強部２６の側面２６ｃが整面されている。このため、塗布液２７を硬化させることによって得られる補強部２６において、その第１面２６ａの端部２６ａｅの位置は、第１保護膜８１の端面８１ｃの位置に一致することになる。同様に、補強部２６の第２面２６ｂの端部２６ｂｅの位置は、第２保護膜８２の端面８２ｃの位置に一致することになる。このように本実施の形態によれば、補強部２６の第１面２６ａの端部２６ａｅの位置および第２面２６ｂの端部２６ｂｅの位置を、保護膜８１，８２の端面８１ｃ，８２ｃの位置に基づいて定めることができる。
　上述のように補強部２６は、所定の流動性を有する塗布液２７に基づいて形成される。従って、仮に保護膜８１，８２のような枠を用いることなく塗布液２７を塗布する場合、塗布液２７の厚みや形状などの寸法を精密に制御することは困難である。一方、保護膜８１，８２の端面８１ｃ，８２ｃは上述のように、金型やレーザーを利用した加工によって高精度にその位置が定められる。従って本実施の形態によれば、塗布液２７の厚みや形状などの寸法の精度として、金型やレーザーを利用した加工における精度に準じる精度を実現することができる。このため本実施の形態によれば、補強部２６の端部２６ａｅ，２６ｂｅの位置、すなわちカバーガラス２０の端部の位置を精度良く定めることができる。このことにより、カバーガラス２０と表示装置１５、ケースとの組立ての際に、工程の容易さや歩留りを高めることができる。また本実施の形態のようにカバーガラス２０に第１加飾部６０やタッチパネルセンサ部４０が設けられている場合、表示装置１５に対する第１加飾部６０やタッチパネルセンサ部４０の加工精度も高めることができる。このことにより、カバーガラス付き表示装置１０の高い意匠性や操作性を実現することができる。 In the present embodiment, as described above, in the reinforcing portion 26, the coating liquid 27 overflowing on the end surface 81c of the first protective film 81 and the end surface 82c of the second protective film 82 is used using a squeegee or the like. By scraping, the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 is leveled. For this reason, in the reinforcing part 26 obtained by curing the coating liquid 27, the position of the end part 26ae of the first surface 26a coincides with the position of the end face 81c of the first protective film 81. Similarly, the position of the end portion 26be of the second surface 26b of the reinforcing portion 26 matches the position of the end surface 82c of the second protective film 82. Thus, according to the present embodiment, the position of the end portion 26ae of the first surface 26a and the position of the end portion 26be of the second surface 26b of the reinforcing portion 26 are set to the positions of the end surfaces 81c and 82c of the protective films 81 and 82. Can be determined based on
As described above, the reinforcing portion 26 is formed based on the coating liquid 27 having a predetermined fluidity. Therefore, if the coating liquid 27 is applied without using a frame such as the protective films 81 and 82, it is difficult to precisely control the dimensions such as the thickness and shape of the coating liquid 27. On the other hand, the positions of the end faces 81c and 82c of the protective films 81 and 82 are determined with high accuracy by processing using a mold or a laser as described above. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to realize the accuracy according to the accuracy in the processing using a mold or a laser as the accuracy of the dimensions such as the thickness and shape of the coating liquid 27. For this reason, according to this Embodiment, the position of edge part 26ae, 26be of the reinforcement part 26, ie, the position of the edge part of the cover glass 20, can be defined with a sufficient precision. Thereby, when the cover glass 20, the display device 15, and the case are assembled, the ease of the process and the yield can be increased. Moreover, when the 1st decorating part 60 and the touchscreen sensor part 40 are provided in the cover glass 20 like this Embodiment, the process precision of the 1st decorating part 60 with respect to the display apparatus 15 and the touchscreen sensor part 40 is also improved. be able to. Thereby, the high designability and operativity of the display apparatus 10 with a cover glass are realizable.
　また、補強部２６の側面２６ｃが、端部２６ａｅと端部２６ｂｅとの間をほぼ平坦に広がる平坦面として構成されている場合、補強部２６の端部２６ａｅ，２６ｂｅの位置だけでなく補強部２６の側面２６ｃ全域の位置も、保護膜８１，８２の端面８１ｃ，８２ｃの位置に応じて定まることになる。すなわち、カバーガラス２０の端部だけでなくカバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃ全域の加工精度を高めることができる。 Further, when the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 is configured as a flat surface that extends substantially flat between the end portion 26ae and the end portion 26be, not only the position of the end portions 26ae and 26be of the reinforcing portion 26 but also the reinforcing portion. The position of the entire side surface 26c of the 26 is also determined according to the positions of the end surfaces 81c and 82c of the protective films 81 and 82. That is, the processing accuracy of the entire side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 as well as the end portion of the cover glass 20 can be increased.
　また本実施の形態によれば、カバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃが、樹脂からなる補強部２６によって構成されていることから、カバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃがガラスで構成されている場合に比べて、カバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃのエッジ部について、面取りなどによる裂傷防止加工をする必要がない。 Moreover, according to this Embodiment, since the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 is comprised by the reinforcement part 26 which consists of resin, compared with the case where the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 is comprised with glass, it is a cover. The edge portion of the side surface 20c of the glass 20 does not need to be subjected to laceration prevention processing such as chamfering.
　なおカバーガラス２０の補強部２６は、カバーガラス２０の第１面２０ａ側に設けられる第１加飾部６０や第２加飾部６２と同色を呈するよう構成されていてもよい。例えば補強部２６は、第１加飾部６０や第２加飾部６２に含まれている着色顔料と同色の着色顔料を含んでいても良い。この場合、非アクティブエリアＡａ２の外縁周辺の領域が、それよりも内側に位置する第１加飾部６０や第２加飾部６２の領域と同色の領域として視認されることになる。このため、第１加飾部６０や第２加飾部６２が非アクティブエリアＡａ２の外縁にまで延びている場合と同様の意匠上の効果を得ることができる。
　一般に第１加飾部６０や第２加飾部６２は、樹脂材料および顔料を含む塗布液をカバーガラス２０上（単位基材２２上または補強部２６上）に塗布することによって形成される。一方、非アクティブエリアＡａ２の外縁周辺の領域に塗布液を正確に塗布することは容易ではない。
　ここで、補強部２６が上述のように着色されている場合、第１加飾部６０や第２加飾部６２を非アクティブエリアＡａ２の外縁周辺の領域にまで設けることなく、非アクティブエリアＡａ２の外縁周辺の領域が所望の色で視認されるようになる。このため、第１加飾部６０や第２加飾部６２を設ける工程をより容易なものとすることができる。 In addition, the reinforcement part 26 of the cover glass 20 may be comprised so that the 1st decoration part 60 provided in the 1st surface 20a side of the cover glass 20 and the 2nd decoration part 62 may be exhibited. For example, the reinforcing portion 26 may include a color pigment having the same color as the color pigment included in the first decorative portion 60 and the second decorative portion 62. In this case, the area around the outer edge of the non-active area Aa2 is visually recognized as an area having the same color as the areas of the first decorative portion 60 and the second decorative portion 62 located on the inner side. For this reason, the effect on the design similar to the case where the 1st decorating part 60 and the 2nd decorating part 62 are extended to the outer edge of inactive area Aa2 can be acquired.
Generally, the 1st decoration part 60 and the 2nd decoration part 62 are formed by apply | coating the coating liquid containing a resin material and a pigment on the cover glass 20 (on the unit base material 22 or the reinforcement part 26). On the other hand, it is not easy to accurately apply the coating liquid to a region around the outer edge of the inactive area Aa2.
Here, when the reinforcement part 26 is colored as described above, the first decorative part 60 and the second decorative part 62 are not provided in the region around the outer edge of the inactive area Aa2, and thus the inactive area Aa2 is provided. A region around the outer edge of the image is visually recognized with a desired color. For this reason, the process of providing the 1st decorating part 60 and the 2nd decorating part 62 can be made easier.
　なお「同色」とは、肉眼では色の違いを判別できない程度に２つの色の色度が近接していることを意味している。より具体的には、「同色」とは、２つの色の色差ΔＥ＊ ａｂが１０以下、好ましくは３以下であることを意味している。また「異色」とは、２つの色の色差ΔＥ＊ ａｂが１０よりも大きいことを意味している。ここで色差ΔＥ＊ ａｂとは、Ｌ＊ａ＊ｂ＊表色系におけるＬ＊、ａ＊およびｂ＊に基づいて算出される値であり、肉眼で観察された場合の色の相違に関する指標となる値である。 The “same color” means that the chromaticities of the two colors are close enough that the difference in color cannot be discerned with the naked eye. More specifically, “same color” means that the color difference ΔE * ab between the two colors is 10 or less, preferably 3 or less. The “different color” means that the color difference ΔE * ab between the two colors is larger than 10. Here, the color difference ΔE * ab is a value calculated based on L * , a * and b * in the L * a * b * color system, and is an index relating to a color difference when observed with the naked eye. Is the value.
　なお、上述した実施の形態に対して様々な変更を加えることが可能である。以下、図面を参照しながら、いくつかの変形例について説明する。以下の説明および以下の説明で用いる図面では、上述した実施の形態と同様に構成され得る部分について、上述の実施の形態における対応する部分に対して用いた符号と同一の符号を用いることとし、重複する説明を省略する。また、上述した実施の形態において得られる作用効果が変形例においても得られることが明らかである場合、その説明を省略することもある。 Note that various modifications can be made to the above-described embodiment. Hereinafter, some modifications will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following description and the drawings used in the following description, the same reference numerals as those used for the corresponding parts in the above embodiment are used for the parts that can be configured in the same manner as in the above embodiment. A duplicate description is omitted. In addition, when it is clear that the operational effects obtained in the above-described embodiment can be obtained in the modified example, the description thereof may be omitted.
（第１の変形例）
　上述の本実施の形態においては、基材３０の第１面３０ａ上に第１加飾部６０やタッチパネルセンサ部４０などの要素部７０を形成する要素部形成工程が、基材３０に第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２を設ける保護膜形成工程に先行して実施される例を示した。しかしながら、これに限られることはなく、要素部７０が設けられていない状態の基材３０に対して第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２を設け、その後、基材３０を切断する工程および単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ上に補強部２６を設ける工程を実施してもよい。これによって、図８に示すように、単位基材２２と、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ上に設けられた補強部２６と、を備えたカバーガラス２０を得ることができる。 (First modification)
In the above-described embodiment, the element part forming step of forming the element part 70 such as the first decoration part 60 and the touch panel sensor part 40 on the first surface 30 a of the base material 30 is performed on the base material 30. The example implemented prior to the protective film formation process which provides the protective film 81 and the 2nd protective film 82 was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a step of providing the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 on the base material 30 in a state where the element portion 70 is not provided, and then cutting the base material 30 and You may implement the process of providing the reinforcement part 26 on the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22. FIG. As a result, as shown in FIG. 8, it is possible to obtain the cover glass 20 including the unit base material 22 and the reinforcing portion 26 provided on the side surface 22 c of the unit base material 22.
　図８に示す本変形例において、補強部２６は、所定の色を呈するよう構成されていてもよい。例えば補強部２６は、所定の色を呈する着色顔料を含んでいてもよい。この場合、第１加飾部６０や第２加飾部６２を設けることなく、外周部からの光漏れ防止などの意匠性の向上を実現することができる。また図示はしないが、図８に示す本変形例において、カバーガラス２０は、補強部２６を形成した後に補強部２６の第１面２６ａ上に設けられる加飾部をさらに備えていてもよい。 In the present modification shown in FIG. 8, the reinforcing portion 26 may be configured to exhibit a predetermined color. For example, the reinforcing part 26 may include a color pigment exhibiting a predetermined color. In this case, it is possible to realize an improvement in design properties such as prevention of light leakage from the outer peripheral portion without providing the first decorative portion 60 and the second decorative portion 62. Although not shown, in the present modification shown in FIG. 8, the cover glass 20 may further include a decorating portion provided on the first surface 26 a of the reinforcing portion 26 after the reinforcing portion 26 is formed.
（第２の変形例）
　上述の第１の変形例においては、第１加飾部６０およびタッチパネルセンサ部４０のいずれも設けられていない状態の基材３０に対して第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２が設けられる例を示した。しかしながら、これに限られることはなく、タッチパネルセンサ部４０は設けられてないが第１加飾部６０は設けられている状態の基材３０に対して第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２を設け、その後、基材３０を切断する工程および単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ上に補強部２６を設ける工程を実施してもよい。これによって、図９に示すように、単位基材２２と、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａ上に設けられた第１加飾部６０と、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ上に設けられた補強部２６と、を備えたカバーガラス２０を得ることができる。また図９に示すように、カバーガラス２０は、補強部２６が形成された後に第１加飾部６０の外側の位置に設けられる第２加飾部６２をさらに備えていてもよい。 (Second modification)
In the first modified example described above, the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 are provided for the base material 30 in a state where neither the first decoration unit 60 nor the touch panel sensor unit 40 is provided. An example is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 with respect to the base material 30 in a state where the touch panel sensor unit 40 is not provided but the first decoration unit 60 is provided. Then, the step of cutting the base material 30 and the step of providing the reinforcing portion 26 on the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 may be performed. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 9, the unit base material 22, the first decorating part 60 provided on the first surface 22 a of the unit base material 22, and the side surface 22 c of the unit base material 22 are provided. The cover glass 20 provided with the reinforcement part 26 can be obtained. As shown in FIG. 9, the cover glass 20 may further include a second decorating part 62 provided at a position outside the first decorating part 60 after the reinforcing part 26 is formed.
（第３の変形例）
　塗布液２７を硬化させることによって補強部２６を得た後、補強部２６の側面２６ｃを加工することにより、側面２６ｃの形状を、すなわちカバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃの形状を整えてもよい。補強部２６は上述のように樹脂材料によって構成されているので、カバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃが強化ガラスによって構成されている場合に比べて、カバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃを加工して所望の形状を得ることがより容易である。また、加工に起因する強度の低下やマイクロクラックの発生が生じにくい。加工方法としては例えば、研磨機を用いた加工を採用することができる。 (Third Modification)
After obtaining the reinforcing portion 26 by curing the coating liquid 27, the shape of the side surface 26c, that is, the shape of the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 may be adjusted by processing the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26. Since the reinforcement part 26 is comprised with the resin material as mentioned above, compared with the case where the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 is comprised with the tempered glass, the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 is processed, and a desired shape is formed. It is easier to get. In addition, strength reduction and microcracks are less likely to occur due to processing. As a processing method, for example, processing using a polishing machine can be employed.
　例えば図１０に示すように、補強部２６の第１面２６ａ側の端部２６ａｅおよび第２面２６ｂ側の端部２６ｂｅの両方を削り落とすよう、補強部２６の側面２６ｃを加工してもよい。図１０に示す例においては、補強部２６の側面２６ｃのうち第１面２６ａと交わる部分および第２面２６ｂと交わる部分の両方が、丸面に加工されている。この場合であっても、加工されない部分（未加工部分２６ｄ）が側面２２ｃに一部でも残っていれば、保護膜８１，８２を利用した上述の塗布方法に基づいて、カバーガラス２０における高い外形寸法精度を確保することができる。なお図１０においては、側面２６ｃが丸面となるよう側面２６ｃが加工される例が示されているが、これに限られることはなく、図示はしないが、側面２６ｃが角面となるよう側面２６ｃが加工されてもよい。また図示はしないが、補強部２６の第１面２６ａ側の端部２６ａｅおよび第２面２６ｂ側の端部２６ｂｅのうちの一方、例えば第１面２６ａ側の端部２６ａｅを少なくとも削り落とすよう、補強部２６の側面２６ｃを加工してもよい。 For example, as shown in FIG. 10, the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 may be processed so that both the end portion 26ae on the first surface 26a side and the end portion 26be on the second surface 26b side of the reinforcing portion 26 are scraped off. . In the example shown in FIG. 10, both the portion that intersects the first surface 26 a and the portion that intersects the second surface 26 b of the side surface 26 c of the reinforcing portion 26 are processed into round surfaces. Even in this case, if even a part that is not processed (unprocessed part 26d) remains on the side surface 22c, the outer shape of the cover glass 20 is increased based on the above-described coating method using the protective films 81 and 82. Dimensional accuracy can be ensured. FIG. 10 shows an example in which the side surface 26c is processed so that the side surface 26c becomes a round surface. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although not illustrated, the side surface 26c becomes a square surface. 26c may be processed. Although not shown, one of the end portion 26ae on the first surface 26a side and the end portion 26be on the second surface 26b side of the reinforcing portion 26, for example, at least the end portion 26ae on the first surface 26a side is scraped off. The side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 may be processed.
（第４の変形例）
　上述の本実施の形態においては、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ、第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２によって囲われた空間内に塗布液２７を塗布することによって補強部２６が形成される例を示したが、これに限られることはない。その他の方法によって補強部２６や後述する孔用補強部２８などの補強部が形成される場合であっても、補強部を構成する樹脂材料がポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂を含むことにより、十分に重合反応を経た、所望の硬度および靱性を有する補強部を得ることができる。また、補強部の印刷適性を十分に確保することができる。補強部の形成方法の例としては、射出成形法、ディスペンシング法、噴霧塗装法、ローラー塗装法やディッピング法などを挙げることができる。図１１は、ディッピング法によって形成された補強部２６を備えたカバーガラス２０の一例を示す断面図である。 (Fourth modification)
In the above-described embodiment, the reinforcing portion 26 is formed by applying the coating liquid 27 in the space surrounded by the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22, the first protective film 81, and the second protective film 82. An example is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even when reinforcing parts such as the reinforcing part 26 and the hole reinforcing part 28 described later are formed by other methods, the resin material constituting the reinforcing part contains a polyene-polythiol-based resin so that it is sufficiently polymerized. A reinforced part having a desired hardness and toughness after the reaction can be obtained. Moreover, the printability of the reinforcing part can be sufficiently ensured. Examples of the method for forming the reinforcing portion include an injection molding method, a dispensing method, a spray coating method, a roller coating method, and a dipping method. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of the cover glass 20 provided with the reinforcing portion 26 formed by the dipping method.
（第５の変形例）
　上述の本実施の形態においては、側面２２ｃが、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａの端部２２ａｅに交わるとともに、単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂ側へ向かうにつれて外側へ広がる第１側面２２ｄと、単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂの端部２２ｂｅに交わるとともに、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａ側へ向かうにつれて外側へ広がる第２面２２ｅと、を含む例を示した。しかしながら、補強部２６を設けることができる限りにおいて、側面２２ｃの形状が特に限定されることはない。例えば図１２に示すように、側面２２ｃは、第１面２２ａおよび第２面２２ｂに対して直交するように広がっていてもよい。このような形状を有する側面２２ｃは、例えば、レーザーを利用して基材３０を切断することによって形成され得る。また、カッターやレーザーを利用して基材３０の表面にスクライブラインを形成し、その後、基材３０に打撃力や曲げ応力を加えることにより、スクライブラインを起点として基材３０を切断することによっても、図１２に示す側面２２ｃが形成され得る。 (Fifth modification)
In the present embodiment described above, the side surface 22c intersects the end portion 22ae of the first surface 22a of the unit base member 22, and the first side surface 22d that spreads outward toward the second surface 22b side of the unit base member 22. And the second surface 22e that intersects with the end 22be of the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 and expands outward as it goes to the first surface 22a side of the unit base member 22 is shown. However, the shape of the side surface 22c is not particularly limited as long as the reinforcing portion 26 can be provided. For example, as shown in FIG. 12, the side surface 22c may extend so as to be orthogonal to the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b. The side surface 22c having such a shape can be formed, for example, by cutting the substrate 30 using a laser. Further, by forming a scribe line on the surface of the base material 30 using a cutter or a laser, and then applying a striking force or a bending stress to the base material 30, the base material 30 is cut from the scribe line as a starting point. Alternatively, the side surface 22c shown in FIG. 12 may be formed.
（第６の変形例）
　上述の本実施の形態においては、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃで引張応力層２４ｂが露出している例を示した。しかしながら、これに限られることはなく、図１３に示すように、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａおよび第２面２２ｂだけでなく側面２２ｃにも圧縮応力層２４ａが形成されていてもよい。この場合であっても、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ上に補強部２６を設けることにより、カバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃに衝撃が加えられた場合に単位基材２２の側面２２ｃに伝わる力を緩和することができる。 (Sixth Modification)
In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the tensile stress layer 24b is exposed on the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 13, the compressive stress layer 24 a may be formed not only on the first surface 22 a and the second surface 22 b of the unit base member 22 but also on the side surface 22 c. Even in this case, the force transmitted to the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 when the impact is applied to the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 is reduced by providing the reinforcing portion 26 on the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22. can do.
　上述の第５および第６の変形例において、側面２２ｃ上に補強部２６を形成する方法が特に限られることはなく、上述の本実施の形態および各変形例で挙げた方法などが適宜採用される。なお第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２を利用して塗布液２７を塗布することによって補強部２６を形成する場合、第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２は、基材３０を切断して単位基材２２を得た後に単位基材２２の第１面２２ａ上および第２面２２ｂ上に設けられたものであってもよい。 In the fifth and sixth modified examples described above, the method for forming the reinforcing portion 26 on the side surface 22c is not particularly limited, and the methods described in the present embodiment and the modified examples are appropriately adopted. The In addition, when forming the reinforcement part 26 by apply | coating the coating liquid 27 using the 1st protective film 81 and the 2nd protective film 82, the 1st protective film 81 and the 2nd protective film 82 cut | disconnect the base material 30. Then, after the unit base material 22 is obtained, the unit base material 22 may be provided on the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b.
（第７の変形例）
　上述の実施の形態や各変形例においては、単位基材２２の側面のうち単位基材２２の外形を構成する側面２２ｃ上に補強部２６が形成される例を示した。しかしながら、これに限られることはなく、図１４に示すように単位基材２２に貫通孔２５が形成されている場合、貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ上に補強部を設けてもよい。すなわち本願において、「単位基材２２の側面」は、単位基材２２に形成されている貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃをも含む概念である。貫通孔２５は例えば、カメラやスピーカーなどを表示装置に搭載するために設けられるものである。図１４および後述する図１５においては、単位基材２２の外形を構成する側面２２ｃ上に設けられる補強部との区別のため、貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ上に設けられる補強部が符号２８で表されている。 (Seventh Modification)
In the above-mentioned embodiment and each modification, the example in which the reinforcement part 26 was formed on the side surface 22c which comprises the external shape of the unit base material 22 among the side surfaces of the unit base material 22 was shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the through hole 25 is formed in the unit base member 22 as shown in FIG. 14, a reinforcing portion may be provided on the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25. That is, in the present application, the “side surface of the unit base material 22” is a concept including the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 formed in the unit base material 22. The through hole 25 is provided, for example, for mounting a camera, a speaker, or the like on the display device. In FIG. 14 and FIG. 15 to be described later, the reinforcing portion provided on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 is denoted by reference numeral 28 for distinction from the reinforcing portion provided on the side surface 22c constituting the outer shape of the unit base member 22. Has been.
　図１５は、図１４に示す貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ上に補強部２８を形成する工程を示す断面図である。なお図１５においては、貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ上だけでなく、単位基材２２の外形を構成する側面２２ｃ上にも補強部２６が形成されている様子を示している。図１５に示す例において、第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２は、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃよりも内側に突出するように設けられている。このため、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ、第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２によって囲われた空間内に塗布液２７を塗布することにより、図１５に示すように、高い寸法精度で壁面２５ｃ上に補強部２８を形成することができる。 FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view showing a step of forming the reinforcing portion 28 on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 shown in FIG. FIG. 15 shows a state in which the reinforcing portion 26 is formed not only on the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 but also on the side surface 22 c constituting the outer shape of the unit base material 22. In the example shown in FIG. 15, the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 are provided so as to protrude inward from the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22. For this reason, by applying the coating liquid 27 in the space surrounded by the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22, the first protective film 81, and the second protective film 82, as shown in FIG. The reinforcing portion 28 can be formed on the wall surface 25c with dimensional accuracy.
　本変形例においても、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ上に設けられる補強部２８は、ポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂を含んでいる。このため、十分に重合反応を経た、所望の硬度を有する補強部２８を貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ上に設けることができる。また、補強部２８の印刷適性を十分に確保することができる。 Also in this modification, the reinforcing portion 28 provided on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 includes a polyene-polythiol resin. For this reason, it is possible to provide the reinforcing portion 28 having a desired hardness that has undergone a sufficient polymerization reaction on the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25. Further, the printability of the reinforcing portion 28 can be sufficiently ensured.
　（その他の変形例）
　また上述の本実施の形態においては、補強部２６および塗布液２７が、加熱または紫外線照射などによって重合反応が進行し、これによって硬化する硬化性樹脂を含む例を示したが、これに限られることはない。単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ上に塗布される際には所定の流動性を有するが、その後に硬化することができる限りにおいて、第１の実施の形態および各変形例や、後述する第２の実施の形態および各変形例において、補強部２６を形成するための塗布液２７として様々な流動体を用いることができる。例えば塗布液２７として、熱によって溶融した状態の樹脂材料からなる流動体を用いてもよい。この場合、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ上に塗布液２７が塗布された後、塗布液２７が冷えて固化することにより、塗布液２７が硬くなる。これによって、樹脂材料を含む補強部２６を得ることができる。このように本実施の形態において、「硬化」とは、加熱または紫外線照射などによって樹脂材料が硬化する現象だけでなく、冷えて固化することによって樹脂材料が硬化する現象をも含む概念である。なお自然冷却によって樹脂材料が冷えて固化してもよく、若しくは、強制冷却によって樹脂材料が冷えて固化してもよい。また「固化」とは、物質が、気体または液体の状態から固体の状態に変化することを意味している。 (Other variations)
In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the reinforcing portion 26 and the coating solution 27 include a curable resin that cures by heating or ultraviolet irradiation and is cured by the polymerization reaction is shown. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. There is nothing. When it is applied onto the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22, it has a predetermined fluidity. However, as long as it can be cured thereafter, the first embodiment and each modified example, or a second type which will be described later. In the embodiment and each modification, various fluids can be used as the coating liquid 27 for forming the reinforcing portion 26. For example, a fluid made of a resin material melted by heat may be used as the coating liquid 27. In this case, after the coating liquid 27 is applied onto the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22, the coating liquid 27 is hardened by being cooled and solidified. Thereby, the reinforcement part 26 containing a resin material can be obtained. Thus, in this embodiment, “curing” is a concept including not only a phenomenon in which the resin material is cured by heating or ultraviolet irradiation, but also a phenomenon in which the resin material is cured by being cooled and solidified. The resin material may be cooled and solidified by natural cooling, or the resin material may be cooled and solidified by forced cooling. “Solidification” means that the substance changes from a gas or liquid state to a solid state.
　なお、上述した実施の形態に対するいくつかの変形例を説明してきたが、当然に、複数の変形例を適宜組み合わせて適用することも可能である。 In addition, although some modified examples with respect to the above-described embodiment have been described, naturally, a plurality of modified examples can be applied in combination as appropriate.
　第２の実施の形態
　次に、本発明の第２の実施の形態について説明する。上述の第１の実施の形態の図１４および図１５に示す変形例においては、補強部が設けられた単位基材２２の側面が、単位基材２２に形成されている貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃである例を示した。本実施の形態においては、貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃに補強部２８が設けられる場合について、より詳細に説明する。本実施の形態においては、貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃに設けられている補強部２８のことを、孔用補強部２８とも称する。また、単位基材２２の外形を構成する側面２２ｃ上に設けられている補強部のことを、側面用補強部２６とも称する。第２の実施の形態において、第１の実施の形態と同一部分には同一符号を付して詳細な説明は省略する。 Second Embodiment Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the modification shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 of the first embodiment described above, the side surface of the unit base material 22 provided with the reinforcing portion is the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 formed in the unit base material 22. An example is shown. In the present embodiment, the case where the reinforcing portion 28 is provided on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 will be described in more detail. In the present embodiment, the reinforcing portion 28 provided on the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 is also referred to as a hole reinforcing portion 28. In addition, the reinforcing portion provided on the side surface 22 c constituting the outer shape of the unit base material 22 is also referred to as a side surface reinforcing portion 26. In the second embodiment, the same parts as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.
　（カバーガラス）
　図１６は、本実施の形態におけるカバーガラス２０を示す平面図である。図１６に示すように、カバーガラス２０は、平面視において、四隅を有する矩形状の形状を有する単位基材２２と、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ上に設けられた側面用補強部２６と、を備えている。側面用補強部２６は、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃを保護するために任意に設けられるものである。図１６に示す例において、側面用補強部２６は、平面視において単位基材２２の側面２２ｃを取り囲むよう設けられている。側面用補強部２６や単位基材２２の側面２２ｃの形状は、上述の第１の実施の形態の場合と同一であるので、詳細な説明を省略する。 (cover glass)
FIG. 16 is a plan view showing cover glass 20 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 16, the cover glass 20 includes a unit base material 22 having a rectangular shape having four corners in a plan view, a side surface reinforcing portion 26 provided on the side surface 22 c of the unit base material 22, and It has. The side reinforcing portion 26 is arbitrarily provided to protect the side surface 22 c of the unit base material 22. In the example shown in FIG. 16, the side reinforcing portion 26 is provided so as to surround the side surface 22 c of the unit base material 22 in a plan view. Since the shape of the side reinforcing portion 26 and the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 is the same as in the case of the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof is omitted.
　図１６に示すように、カバーガラス２０には貫通孔２３が形成されており、この貫通孔２３の壁面は孔用補強部２８によって構成されている。孔用補強部２８は、貫通孔２３の耐衝撃性を高めるために、単位基材２２に形成された貫通孔の壁面上に設けられるものである。以下、図１７および図１８を参照して、孔用補強部２８について詳細に説明する。図１７は、図１６に示すカバーガラス２０の線XXVIIに沿った断面図である。また図１８は、図１７のカバーガラス２０の貫通孔２３を拡大して示す断面図である。 As shown in FIG. 16, a through hole 23 is formed in the cover glass 20, and the wall surface of the through hole 23 is constituted by a hole reinforcing portion 28. The hole reinforcing portion 28 is provided on the wall surface of the through hole formed in the unit base material 22 in order to improve the impact resistance of the through hole 23. Hereinafter, the hole reinforcing portion 28 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view taken along line XXVII of the cover glass 20 shown in FIG. FIG. 18 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the through hole 23 of the cover glass 20 of FIG.
　図１７に示すように、孔用補強部２８は、単位基材２２に形成された貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ上に設けられている。なお後述する図１９Ｄ（ｃ）から明らかなように、「単位基材２２の貫通孔２５」とは、孔用補強部２８が設けられていない状態にある、単位基材２２を貫通する孔のことを意味している。また「カバーガラス２０の貫通孔２３」とは、その壁面２３ｃが、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ上に設けられた孔用補強部２８によって構成されている、カバーガラス２０を貫通する孔のことを意味している。なお本願に添付する図面においては、図が煩雑になるのを防ぐため、孔用補強部２８や後述する塗布液２７が設けられた後の貫通孔には、原則として符号２３を付し、符号２５を省略している。 As shown in FIG. 17, the hole reinforcing portion 28 is provided on the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 formed in the unit base material 22. As will be apparent from FIG. 19D (c), which will be described later, “the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22” refers to a hole penetrating the unit base material 22 in a state where the hole reinforcing portion 28 is not provided. It means that. The “through hole 23 of the cover glass 20” means that the wall surface 23 c penetrates the cover glass 20, which is constituted by the hole reinforcing portion 28 provided on the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22. It means a hole to be made. In the drawings attached to the present application, in order to prevent the drawing from becoming complicated, in principle, the through hole after the hole reinforcing portion 28 and the coating liquid 27 described later are provided with reference numeral 23. 25 is omitted.
　図１８に示すように、単位基材２２の引張応力層２４ｂは、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃにまで達している。すなわち単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃでは引張応力層２４ｂが露出している。このため単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃは、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａおよび第２面２２ｂと比較して、クラックなどの損傷に対して弱くなっている。上述の孔用補強部２８は、このような単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃを保護するために設けられたものである。 18, the tensile stress layer 24 b of the unit base material 22 reaches the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22. That is, the tensile stress layer 24 b is exposed on the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22. For this reason, the wall surface 25c of the through-hole 25 of the unit base material 22 is weak against damages such as cracks as compared with the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base material 22. The hole reinforcing portion 28 described above is provided to protect the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 as described above.
　孔用補強部２８を構成する材料としては、例えば、加熱または紫外線照射などによって硬化する硬化性樹脂が用いられる。この場合、硬化前の成形時には孔用補強部２８は所望の流動性を有しており、そして硬化後には孔用補強部２８は所望の硬度や強度を有するようになる。このことにより、成形性と硬度や強度とを両立させることができる。また、上述の第１の実施の形態の場合と同様に、孔用補強部２８を構成する材料が、ポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂を含んでいてもよい。 As the material constituting the hole reinforcing portion 28, for example, a curable resin that is cured by heating or ultraviolet irradiation is used. In this case, the hole reinforcing portion 28 has desired fluidity at the time of molding before curing, and the hole reinforcing portion 28 has desired hardness and strength after curing. This makes it possible to achieve both formability, hardness and strength. Further, as in the case of the first embodiment described above, the material constituting the hole reinforcing portion 28 may contain a polyene-polythiol resin.
　（孔用補強部）
　　次に図１８を参照して、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃおよび孔用補強部２８の形状についてより詳細に説明する。 (Reinforcing part for hole)
Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the shape of the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 of the unit base member 22 will be described in more detail.
　はじめに孔用補強部２８の形状について説明する。図１８に示すように、孔用補強部２８は、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａの端部２２ａｆから側方へ延びる第１面２８ａ、単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂの端部２２ｂｆから側方へ延びる第２面２８ｂ、および、第１面２８ａと前記第２面２８ｂとの間に広がる側面２８ｃを含んでいる。図１８に示す例において、孔用補強部２８の第１面２８ａは、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａと同一平面上に位置している。同様に、孔用補強部２８の第２面２８ｂは、単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂと同一平面上に位置している。すなわち、上述の第１の実施の形態における補強部２６の場合と同様に、単位基材２２と孔用補強部２８との間に段差が全くまたはほとんど存在していない。具体的には、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａおよび第２面２２ｂと孔用補強部２８の第１面２８ａおよび第２面２８ｂとの間の段差がそれぞれ１０μｍ以下になっている。このため、第１の実施の形態における補強部２６の場合と同様の利点を得ることができる。例えば、カバーガラス２０の貫通孔２３の強度の確保と、カバーガラス２０の意匠性の確保とを両立させることができる。 First, the shape of the hole reinforcing portion 28 will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, the hole reinforcing portion 28 includes a first surface 28 a extending laterally from an end portion 22 af of the first surface 22 a of the unit base material 22, and an end portion 22 bf of the second surface 22 b of the unit base material 22. And a side surface 28c extending between the first surface 28a and the second surface 28b. In the example shown in FIG. 18, the first surface 28 a of the hole reinforcing portion 28 is located on the same plane as the first surface 22 a of the unit base member 22. Similarly, the second surface 28 b of the hole reinforcing portion 28 is located on the same plane as the second surface 22 b of the unit base member 22. That is, as in the case of the reinforcing portion 26 in the first embodiment described above, there is no or almost no step between the unit base member 22 and the hole reinforcing portion 28. Specifically, the steps between the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 and the first surface 28a and the second surface 28b of the hole reinforcing portion 28 are each 10 μm or less. For this reason, the same advantage as the case of the reinforcement part 26 in 1st Embodiment can be acquired. For example, ensuring the strength of the through-hole 23 of the cover glass 20 and ensuring the design of the cover glass 20 can both be achieved.
　次に孔用補強部２８の側面２８ｃについて説明する。図１８において、孔用補強部２８の第１面２８ａの内側の端部が符号２８ａｅで表されており、孔用補強部２８の第２面２８ｂの内側の端部が符号２８ｂｅで表されている。孔用補強部２８の第１面２８ａおよび第２面２８ｂは、図１８に示すように、端部２８ａｅおよび端部２８ｂｅに達するまで単位基材２２の第１面２２ａおよび第２面２２ｂと同一平面上に広がっていてもよい。若しくは、孔用補強部２８の第１面２８ａおよび第２面２８ｂは、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａおよび第２面２２ｂと同一平面上で、所定の距離にわたって、例えば少なくとも３００μｍにわたって、端部２２ａｆおよび端部２２ｂｆから側方へ延び、その後、湾曲したり屈曲したりしていてもよい。なお「同一平面上」とは、上述の段差の場合と同様に、孔用補強部２８の第１面２８ａおよび第２面２８ｂのうち少なくとも３００μｍにわたって端部２２ａｆおよび端部２２ｂｆから側方へ延びている部分と、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａおよび第２面２２ｂとの間の、単位基材２２の厚み方向における間隔が、１０μｍ以下になっていることを意味している。 Next, the side surface 28c of the hole reinforcing portion 28 will be described. In FIG. 18, the inner end portion of the first surface 28 a of the hole reinforcing portion 28 is represented by reference numeral 28 ae, and the inner end portion of the second surface 28 b of the hole reinforcing portion 28 is represented by reference numeral 28 be. Yes. As shown in FIG. 18, the first surface 28a and the second surface 28b of the hole reinforcing portion 28 are the same as the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 until reaching the end portion 28ae and the end portion 28be. It may spread on a plane. Alternatively, the first surface 28a and the second surface 28b of the hole reinforcing portion 28 are ends on the same plane as the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 over a predetermined distance, for example, at least 300 μm. It may extend from the portion 22af and the end portion 22bf to the side and then bend or bend. Note that “on the same plane” means that, as in the case of the above-described step, the first and second surfaces 28a and 28b of the hole reinforcing portion 28 extend laterally from the end 22af and the end 22bf over at least 300 μm. This means that the distance in the thickness direction of the unit base material 22 between the portion and the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base material 22 is 10 μm or less.
　次に、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃの形状について説明する。図１８に示すように、貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃは、第１壁面２５ｄおよび第２壁面２５ｅを含んでいる。第１壁面２５ｄは、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａに交わるとともに、単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂ側へ向かうにつれて貫通孔２５の中心側へ広がっている。また第２壁面２５ｅは、単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂに交わるとともに、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａ側へ向かうにつれて貫通孔２５の中心側へ広がり、そして第１壁面２５ｄに合流している。このため、側面２２ｃの場合と同様に、第１壁面２５ｄと第２壁面２５ｅとの合流部分が外側に突出することになる。この場合、孔用補強部２８が単位基材２２の壁面２５ｃを挟み込む形になるため、孔用補強部２８を単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃに強固に密着させることができる。
　このような形状を有する第１壁面２５ｄおよび第２壁面２５ｅは、側面２２ｃの第１側面２２ｄおよび第２側面２２ｅの場合と同様に、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａ側および第２面２２ｂ側の両方から単位基材２２をウェットエッチングして貫通孔２５を形成することによって得られる。 Next, the shape of the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 includes a first wall surface 25d and a second wall surface 25e. The first wall surface 25 d intersects with the first surface 22 a of the unit base material 22, and spreads toward the center side of the through hole 25 toward the second surface 22 b side of the unit base material 22. Further, the second wall surface 25e intersects the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22, expands toward the center of the through hole 25 toward the first surface 22a side of the unit base member 22, and joins the first wall surface 25d. ing. For this reason, as in the case of the side surface 22c, the merged portion of the first wall surface 25d and the second wall surface 25e protrudes outward. In this case, since the hole reinforcing portion 28 sandwiches the wall surface 25 c of the unit base material 22, the hole reinforcing portion 28 can be firmly adhered to the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22.
The first wall surface 25d and the second wall surface 25e having such a shape are the same as the first side surface 22d and the second side surface 22e of the side surface 22c, and the first surface 22a side and the second surface 22b of the unit base material 22. It is obtained by wet etching the unit base material 22 from both sides to form the through hole 25.
　次に、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ上に設けられた孔用補強部２８の被覆寸法について説明する。ここで孔用補強部２８の被覆寸法とは、上述の第１の実施の形態の補強部２６の場合と同様に、側面２８ｃの法線方向に沿った方向における孔用補強部２８の長さのことである。孔用補強部２８の被覆寸法の最小値Ｔｍｉｎおよび最大値Ｔｍｉｎは、上述の第１の実施の形態の補強部２６の場合と同様の範囲に設定され得る。 Next, the covering dimension of the hole reinforcing portion 28 provided on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 will be described. Here, the covering dimension of the hole reinforcing portion 28 is the length of the hole reinforcing portion 28 in the direction along the normal direction of the side surface 28c, as in the case of the reinforcing portion 26 of the first embodiment described above. That is. The minimum value Tmin and the maximum value Tmin of the covering dimension of the hole reinforcing portion 28 can be set in the same range as in the case of the reinforcing portion 26 of the first embodiment described above.
　カバーガラス２０の厚み（すなわち単位基材２２の厚み、側面用補強部２６の厚みおよび孔用補強部２８の厚み）は、求められる強度や、カバーガラス２０の面積などに応じて適切に設定されるが、例えば０．１ｍｍ～１ｍｍの範囲内になっている。 The thickness of the cover glass 20 (that is, the thickness of the unit base member 22, the thickness of the side reinforcing portion 26, and the thickness of the hole reinforcing portion 28) is appropriately set according to the required strength, the area of the cover glass 20, and the like. For example, it is in the range of 0.1 mm to 1 mm.
　（カバーガラスの製造方法）
　次に、以上のような構成からなるカバーガラス２０を製造する方法について、図１９Ａ～図２０Ｄを参照して説明する。 (Method for manufacturing cover glass)
Next, a method of manufacturing the cover glass 20 having the above configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 19A to 20D.
　はじめに図１９Ａ～図１９Ｄ（ａ）（ｂ）（ｃ）を参照して、大型の強化ガラスからなる基材３０を用いて、単位基材２２および保護膜８１，８２を有する単位積層体３５を形成する工程について説明する。なお図１９Ａ、図１９Ｂ、図１９Ｃ（ａ）および図１９Ｄ（ａ）は、本工程における基材３０を示す断面図である。また図１９Ｄ（ｂ）は、図１９Ｄ（ａ）に示す単位積層体３５の単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ近傍を拡大して示す断面図であり、図１９Ｄ（ｃ）は、図１９Ｄ（ａ）に示す単位積層体３５の単位基材２２の貫通孔２５近傍を拡大して示す断面図である。また図１９Ｃ（ｂ）は、図１９Ｃ（ａ）に示す基材３０を上方から見た場合を示す平面図である。 First, referring to FIGS. 19A to 19D (a), (b) and (c), a unit laminate 35 having a unit substrate 22 and protective films 81 and 82 is formed using a substrate 30 made of large tempered glass. The process to form is demonstrated. In addition, FIG. 19A, FIG. 19B, FIG. 19C (a), and FIG. 19D (a) are sectional drawings which show the base material 30 in this process. FIG. 19D (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing the vicinity of the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 of the unit laminate body 35 shown in FIG. 19D (a). FIG. 19D (c) is the same as FIG. 19D (a). It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the through-hole 25 vicinity of the unit base material 22 of the unit laminated body 35 shown in FIG. FIG. 19C (b) is a plan view showing a case where the substrate 30 shown in FIG. 19C (a) is viewed from above.
　まず図１９Ａに示すように、大型の強化ガラスからなる基材３０を準備する。基材３０は、第１面３０ａ、第１面３０ａの反対側にある第２面３０ｂ、および、第１面３０ａと第２面３０ｂとの間に広がる側面３０ｃ、を含んでいる。図１９Ａに示すように、基材３０の第１面３０ａ、第２面３０ｂおよび側面３０ｃには圧縮応力層２４ａが形成されており、そして圧縮応力層２４ａの内側には引張応力層２４ｂが存在している。このように基材３０の表面は全て圧縮応力層２４ａによって形成されている。 First, as shown in FIG. 19A, a base material 30 made of large tempered glass is prepared. The base material 30 includes a first surface 30a, a second surface 30b on the opposite side of the first surface 30a, and a side surface 30c extending between the first surface 30a and the second surface 30b. As shown in FIG. 19A, the compressive stress layer 24a is formed on the first surface 30a, the second surface 30b, and the side surface 30c of the base material 30, and the tensile stress layer 24b exists inside the compressive stress layer 24a. is doing. Thus, the entire surface of the base material 30 is formed by the compressive stress layer 24a.
　次に、基材３０の第１面３０ａ上および第２面３０ｂ上において所定の複数の区画に第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２を設ける保護膜形成工程を実施する。まず図１９Ｂに示すように、基材３０の第１面３０ａ上に第１保護膜８１を設け，また基材３０の第２面３０ｂ上に第２保護膜８２を設ける。図１９Ｂに示す例において、第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２はそれぞれ、基材３０の第１面３０ａおよび第２面３０ｂの全域を覆うよう設けられている。 Next, a protective film forming step is performed in which the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 are provided in a predetermined plurality of sections on the first surface 30a and the second surface 30b of the base material 30. First, as shown in FIG. 19B, a first protective film 81 is provided on the first surface 30 a of the base material 30, and a second protective film 82 is provided on the second surface 30 b of the base material 30. In the example shown in FIG. 19B, the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 are provided so as to cover the entire area of the first surface 30a and the second surface 30b of the substrate 30, respectively.
　その後、図１９Ｃ（ａ）（ｂ）に示すように、第１面３０ａおよび第２面３０ｂの全域にわたって設けられていた第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２を、基材３０の区画毎に分断する。例えば図１９Ｃ（ａ）（ｂ）に示すように、保護膜８１，８２を、基材３０の第１面３０ａを紙面の上下方向で２行に区画し紙面の左右方向で３列に区画することによって得られる６区画毎に分断する。これによって、第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２に、各区画の境界に沿った隙間８１ａおよび隙間８２ａが形成される。各区画の寸法は、基材３０を切断することによって得られる各単位基材２２の寸法に対応している。なお本願においては、切断される前の基材３０の各区画のことを「単位基材２２」と表現することもある。 Then, as shown to FIG. 19C (a) (b), the 1st protective film 81 and the 2nd protective film 82 which were provided over the whole region of the 1st surface 30a and the 2nd surface 30b are set for every division of the base material 30. Divide into For example, as shown in FIGS. 19C (a) and 19 (b), the protective films 81 and 82 are divided into two rows in the first surface 30a of the substrate 30 in two rows in the vertical direction of the paper surface and in three columns in the horizontal direction of the paper surface. Divide every 6 sections. As a result, a gap 81a and a gap 82a are formed in the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 along the boundaries between the sections. The dimension of each section corresponds to the dimension of each unit substrate 22 obtained by cutting the substrate 30. In the present application, each section of the base material 30 before being cut may be expressed as a “unit base material 22”.
　また図１９Ｃ（ａ）（ｂ）に示すように、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５に対応する位置において、第１保護膜８１に孔８１ｂを形成し、第２保護膜８２に孔８２ｂを形成する。 Further, as shown in FIGS. 19C (a) and 19 (b), a hole 81b is formed in the first protective film 81 and a hole 82b is formed in the second protective film 82 at a position corresponding to the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22. To do.
　隙間８１ａ，８２ａおよび孔８１ｂ，８２ｂを保護膜８１，８２に形成する具体的な方法が特に限られることはなく、様々な方法が採用され得る。例えば、図１９Ｃ（ｂ）に示す第１保護膜８１の形状に対応した形状を有する金型を用いて、第１保護膜８１の不要部分（間隙および孔になる部分）を除去してもよい。第２面３０ｂ側においても、第２保護膜８２用の金型に対応した形状を有する金型を用いることにより、第２保護膜８２の不要部分（間隙および孔になる部分）が除去され得る。その他にも、レーザー加工を利用して、第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２の不要部分を除去してもよい。 The specific method for forming the gaps 81a and 82a and the holes 81b and 82b in the protective films 81 and 82 is not particularly limited, and various methods can be adopted. For example, unnecessary portions (portions that become gaps and holes) of the first protective film 81 may be removed using a mold having a shape corresponding to the shape of the first protective film 81 shown in FIG. 19C (b). . Also on the second surface 30b side, unnecessary portions (portions that become gaps and holes) of the second protective film 82 can be removed by using a mold having a shape corresponding to the mold for the second protective film 82. . In addition, unnecessary portions of the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 may be removed using laser processing.
　その後、図１９Ｄ（ａ）に示すように、基材３０の各区画に設けられた保護膜８１，８２の隙間８１ａ，８２ａに沿って基材３０を切断するとともに基材３０（単位基材２２）に貫通孔２５を形成する基材加工工程を実施する。具体的には、基材３０の第１面３０ａ側および第２面３０ｂ側から、第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２をレジストとして基材３０をウェットエッチングするエッチング工程を実施することによって、基材３０を切断するとともに貫通孔２５を形成する。エッチング液としては、上述のようにフッ酸などが用いられる。これによって、図１９Ｄ（ａ）に示すように、ガラスからなるとともに貫通孔２５が形成された単位基材２２と、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａ上に設けられた第１保護膜８１と、単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂ上に設けられた第２保護膜８２と、を有する単位積層体３５を得ることができる。 After that, as shown in FIG. 19D (a), the base material 30 is cut along the gaps 81a and 82a between the protective films 81 and 82 provided in each section of the base material 30 and the base material 30 (unit base material 22). The base material processing process which forms the through-hole 25 is implemented. Specifically, from the first surface 30a side and the second surface 30b side of the base material 30, by performing an etching process of wet etching the base material 30 using the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 as a resist The substrate 30 is cut and the through hole 25 is formed. As the etching solution, hydrofluoric acid or the like is used as described above. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 19D (a), the unit base material 22 made of glass and having the through holes 25 formed therein, and the first protective film 81 provided on the first surface 22a of the unit base material 22 The unit laminated body 35 having the second protective film 82 provided on the second surface 22b of the unit base material 22 can be obtained.
　図１９Ｄ（ｂ）は、図１９Ｄ（ａ）に示す単位積層体３５の単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ近傍を拡大して示す断面図である。上述の第１の実施の形態の場合と同様に、端部２２ａｅに交わるとともに第２面２２ｂ側へ向かうにつれて外側へ広がる第１側面２２ｄと、端部２２ｂｅに交わるとともに第１面２２ａ側へ向かうにつれて外側へ広がる第２側面２２ｅと、が得られている。 FIG. 19D (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing the vicinity of the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 of the unit laminate body 35 shown in FIG. 19D (a). As in the case of the first embodiment described above, the first side surface 22d crosses the end 22ae and spreads outward as it goes to the second surface 22b side, and crosses the end 22be and goes to the first surface 22a side. As a result, a second side surface 22e extending outward is obtained.
　図１９Ｄ（ｃ）は、図１９Ｄ（ａ）に示す単位積層体３５の単位基材２２の貫通孔２５近傍を拡大して示す断面図である。図１９Ｄ（ｃ）に示すように、第１保護膜８１の孔８１ｂの壁面８１ｄは、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃよりも、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の中心側に位置している。同様に、第２保護膜８２の孔８２ｂの壁面８２ｄは、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃよりも、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の中心側に位置している。単位基材２２の貫通孔２５と第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２との間のこのような関係は、上述の側面２２ｃの場合と同様に、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａおよび第２面２２ｂ双方からのエッチングにより単位基材２２に貫通孔２５を形成することによって実現される。 FIG. 19D (c) is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing the vicinity of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 of the unit laminate body 35 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 19D (c), the wall surface 81d of the hole 81b of the first protective film 81 is located closer to the center side of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 than the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22. is doing. Similarly, the wall surface 82 d of the hole 82 b of the second protective film 82 is located closer to the center side of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 than the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22. Such a relationship between the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 and the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 is similar to the case of the side surface 22c described above, and the first surface 22a of the unit base material 22 and This is realized by forming the through holes 25 in the unit base material 22 by etching from both the second surfaces 22b.
　（側面用補強部の形成工程）
　次に、上述の第１の実施の形態の場合と同様にして、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ、第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２によって囲われた空間内に塗布液２７を充填してもよい。これによって、単位積層体３５の単位基材２２の側面２２ｃに側面用補強部２６を設けることができる。 (Formation process of side reinforcement)
Next, as in the case of the first embodiment described above, the coating liquid 27 is filled into the space surrounded by the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22, the first protective film 81, and the second protective film 82. May be. As a result, the side reinforcing portion 26 can be provided on the side surface 22 c of the unit base member 22 of the unit laminate body 35.
　（孔用補強部の形成工程）
　次に図２０Ａ～図２０Ｄを参照して、単位積層体３５の単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃに孔用補強部２８を設けるための工程について説明する。 (Process for forming hole reinforcement)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 20A to 20D, a process for providing the hole reinforcing portion 28 on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 of the unit laminate 35 will be described.
　はじめに図２０Ａに示すように、単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂ側で単位基材２２の貫通孔２５および第２保護膜８２の孔８２ｂを下方から封止する封止部材８５を、第２保護膜８２上に配置する。塗布液２７が漏れ出ることを防ぐことができる限りにおいて、封止部材８５を構成する材料が特に限られることはない。例えば、樹脂フィルム等を用いて封止部材８５を構成することができる。 First, as shown in FIG. 20A, the second sealing member 85 that seals the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 and the hole 82b of the second protective film 82 from below on the second surface 22b side of the unit base material 22 Arranged on the protective film 82. As long as the coating liquid 27 can be prevented from leaking out, the material constituting the sealing member 85 is not particularly limited. For example, the sealing member 85 can be configured using a resin film or the like.
　次に図２０Ｂに示すように、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃに、樹脂材料を含む塗布液２７を塗布する孔用塗布工程を実施する。ここでは、上述の第１の実施の形態の場合と同様に、アクリル系樹脂と、光重合開始剤とを含む塗布液２７を用いる例について説明する。 Next, as shown in FIG. 20B, a hole coating step is performed in which a coating liquid 27 containing a resin material is applied to the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22. Here, as in the case of the above-described first embodiment, an example in which the coating liquid 27 containing an acrylic resin and a photopolymerization initiator is used will be described.
　孔用塗布工程において、塗布液２７は、封止された空間内に塗布される。本実施の形態においては、塗布液２７は、封止部材８５、第２保護膜８２、貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃおよび第１保護膜８１によって囲われた空間内に塗布される。好ましくは、塗布液２７は、塗布液２７が少なくとも部分的に第１保護膜８１の底面８１ｅ（単位基材２２側の面）に接するようになるまで、封止された空間内に塗布される。なお図示はしないが、第１保護膜８１上に溢れ出るようになるまで塗布液２７を塗布してもよい。この場合、第１保護膜８１上に溢れ出ている塗布液２７を、スキージなどを用いて掻きとることによって、後に形成される孔用補強部２８の上面を整面してもよい。 In the hole coating step, the coating liquid 27 is applied in the sealed space. In the present embodiment, the coating liquid 27 is applied in a space surrounded by the sealing member 85, the second protective film 82, the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25, and the first protective film 81. Preferably, the coating liquid 27 is applied in the sealed space until the coating liquid 27 comes at least partially in contact with the bottom surface 81e (the surface on the unit base material 22 side) of the first protective film 81. . Although not shown, the coating liquid 27 may be applied until the first protective film 81 overflows. In this case, the upper surface of the hole reinforcing portion 28 to be formed later may be leveled by scraping the coating liquid 27 overflowing on the first protective film 81 with a squeegee or the like.
　その後、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ上に設けられた塗布液２７を硬化させる孔用硬化工程を実施する。ここでは、塗布液２７に紫外線などの光を照射することによって、塗布液２７を硬化させる。これによって図２０Ｂに示すように、塗布液２７に含まれる樹脂材料からなる孔用補強部２８が、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５を塞ぐように形成される。 Thereafter, a hole curing step for curing the coating liquid 27 provided on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 is performed. Here, the coating liquid 27 is cured by irradiating the coating liquid 27 with light such as ultraviolet rays. Thus, as shown in FIG. 20B, the hole reinforcing portion 28 made of the resin material contained in the coating liquid 27 is formed so as to close the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22.
　次に、図２０Ｃに示すように、孔用補強部２８を加工して孔用補強部２８に貫通孔２３を形成する樹脂材料加工工程を実施する。孔用補強部２８に貫通孔２３を形成することができる限りにおいて、孔用補強部２８を加工する方法が特に限られることはない。例えば、ドリルなどを用いた機械加工や、レーザー加工などを適宜採用することができる。なお封止部材８５は、孔用補強部２８に貫通孔２３を形成する前に除去されてもよく、若しくは、孔用補強部２８に貫通孔２３を形成した後に除去されてもよい。 Next, as shown in FIG. 20C, a resin material processing step of processing the hole reinforcing portion 28 to form the through hole 23 in the hole reinforcing portion 28 is performed. As long as the through hole 23 can be formed in the hole reinforcing portion 28, the method of processing the hole reinforcing portion 28 is not particularly limited. For example, machining using a drill or the like, laser processing, or the like can be appropriately employed. The sealing member 85 may be removed before the through hole 23 is formed in the hole reinforcing portion 28, or may be removed after the through hole 23 is formed in the hole reinforcing portion 28.
　なお図２０Ｃにおいては、第１保護膜８１の壁面８１ｄ上や第２保護膜８２の壁面８２ｄ上に孔用補強部２８が残るように孔用補強部２８が加工される例を示したが、これに限られることはない。例えば図２０Ｄに示すように、第１保護膜８１の壁面８１ｄ上および第２保護膜８２の壁面８２ｄ上に孔用補強部２８が残らないように、孔用補強部２８を加工してもよい。 20C shows an example in which the hole reinforcing portion 28 is processed so that the hole reinforcing portion 28 remains on the wall surface 81d of the first protective film 81 and the wall surface 82d of the second protective film 82. It is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 20D, the hole reinforcing portion 28 may be processed so that the hole reinforcing portion 28 does not remain on the wall surface 81d of the first protective film 81 and the wall surface 82d of the second protective film 82. .
　その後、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａ上の第１保護膜８１および単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂ上の第２保護膜８２を除去する。これによって、図１８に示すように、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ上に孔用補強部２８が設けられたカバーガラス２０を得ることができる。 Thereafter, the first protective film 81 on the first surface 22a of the unit base 22 and the second protective film 82 on the second surface 22b of the unit base 22 are removed. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 18, it is possible to obtain the cover glass 20 in which the hole reinforcing portion 28 is provided on the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22.
　本実施の形態によれば、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ上に、硬化性樹脂からなる孔用補強部２８が設けられている。このため、カバーガラス２０に衝撃が加えられた場合に単位基材２２の貫通孔２５に伝わる力が、孔用補強部２８によって緩和され、貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃにクラックなどの損傷が生じることを抑制することができる。このことにより、仮に単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃに圧縮応力層が形成されていない場合であっても、カバーガラス２０の耐衝撃性を十分に高くすることができる。また、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃに引張応力層２４ｂが露出している場合であっても、露出している引張応力層２４ｂを孔用補強部２８によって覆うことができるので、カバーガラス２０の耐衝撃性を十分に高くすることができる。 According to the present embodiment, the hole reinforcing portion 28 made of a curable resin is provided on the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22. For this reason, when an impact is applied to the cover glass 20, the force transmitted to the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 is alleviated by the hole reinforcing portion 28, and damage such as cracks occurs on the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25. Can be suppressed. Accordingly, even if the compressive stress layer is not formed on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22, the impact resistance of the cover glass 20 can be sufficiently increased. Further, even if the tensile stress layer 24b is exposed on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22, the exposed tensile stress layer 24b can be covered by the hole reinforcing portion 28, so The impact resistance of the cover glass 20 can be made sufficiently high.
　また本実施の形態において、孔用補強部２８を構成するための塗布液２７は、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａから貫通孔２５の中心側に突出した第１保護膜８１の底面８１ｅ、および、単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂから貫通孔２５の中心側に突出した第２保護膜８２の底面８２ｅの両方に接するよう塗布される。この場合、孔用補強部２８の面２８ａ，２８ｂの位置は、第１面２２ａ，２２ｂに接している保護膜８１，８２の底面８１ｅ，８２ｅの位置に応じて定まることになる。このため図２０Ｃおよび図２０Ｄに示すように、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａと孔用補強部２８の第１面２８ａとの間には、段差が全くまたはほとんど存在していない。同様に、単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂと孔用補強部２８の第２面２８ｂとの間には、段差が全くまたはほとんど存在していない。従って、単位基材２２と孔用補強部２８との間の境界が観察者から視認されてしまうことを抑制することができる。このため本実施の形態の孔用補強部２８によれば、カバーガラス２０の貫通孔２３の強度の確保と、カバーガラス２０の意匠性の確保とを両立させることができる。また、指などの外部導体をカバーガラス２０上でスライドさせる際に、単位基材２２と孔用補強部２８との間の境界で外部導体が引っ掛かりを感じてしまうことを抑制することができる。従って、タッチパネルの操作感が段差によって阻害されてしまうことを抑制することができる。また、段差によって指などの外部導体が傷ついてしまうことを抑制することができる。 In the present embodiment, the coating liquid 27 for constituting the hole reinforcing portion 28 is a bottom surface 81e of the first protective film 81 projecting from the first surface 22a of the unit base member 22 toward the center of the through hole 25, And it applies so that it may touch both the bottom face 82e of the 2nd protective film 82 which protruded from the 2nd surface 22b of the unit base material 22 to the center side of the through-hole 25. As shown in FIG. In this case, the positions of the surfaces 28a and 28b of the hole reinforcing portion 28 are determined according to the positions of the bottom surfaces 81e and 82e of the protective films 81 and 82 in contact with the first surfaces 22a and 22b. For this reason, as shown in FIGS. 20C and 20D, there is no or almost no step between the first surface 22 a of the unit base member 22 and the first surface 28 a of the hole reinforcing portion 28. Similarly, there is no or almost no step between the second surface 22 b of the unit base member 22 and the second surface 28 b of the hole reinforcing portion 28. Therefore, it can suppress that the boundary between the unit base material 22 and the hole reinforcement part 28 is visually recognized by an observer. For this reason, according to the hole reinforcing portion 28 of the present embodiment, it is possible to ensure both the strength of the through hole 23 of the cover glass 20 and the designability of the cover glass 20. In addition, when the external conductor such as a finger is slid on the cover glass 20, it is possible to suppress the external conductor from being caught at the boundary between the unit base material 22 and the hole reinforcing portion 28. Therefore, it can suppress that the operation feeling of a touchscreen is inhibited by the level | step difference. Moreover, it can suppress that external conductors, such as a finger | toe, are damaged by the level | step difference.
　また本実施の形態においては、塗布液２７を単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃに塗布する際、単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂ側で単位基材２２の貫通孔２５および第２保護膜８２の孔８２ｂを下方から封止する封止部材８５が配置されている。このため、塗布液２７が漏れ出ることを防ぐことができる。 Further, in the present embodiment, when the coating liquid 27 is applied to the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22, the through hole 25 and the second hole of the unit base material 22 on the second surface 22 b side of the unit base material 22. A sealing member 85 for sealing the hole 82b of the protective film 82 from below is disposed. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the coating liquid 27 from leaking out.
　また本実施の形態において、カバーガラス２０の貫通孔２３は、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５を塞ぐよう設けられた樹脂材料からなる孔用補強部２８に、ドリルなどを用いた機械加工や、レーザー加工などを施すことによって得られるものである。この場合、貫通孔２３の形状の精度は、孔用補強部２８の加工の精度に応じて決定される。また、樹脂材料からなる孔用補強部２８を加工することは、強化ガラスを加工することに比べれば容易である。従って本実施の形態によれば、カバーガラス２０の貫通孔２３の形状を精度よく定めることができる。すなわち、貫通孔２３の壁面２３ｃがガラスによって構成されている場合に比べて、所望の形状の貫通孔２３を容易に得ることができる。 Further, in the present embodiment, the through hole 23 of the cover glass 20 is machined using a drill or the like on the hole reinforcing portion 28 made of a resin material provided so as to close the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22. It is obtained by applying laser processing or the like. In this case, the accuracy of the shape of the through hole 23 is determined according to the processing accuracy of the hole reinforcing portion 28. Moreover, it is easier to process the hole reinforcing portion 28 made of a resin material than to process tempered glass. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the shape of the through hole 23 of the cover glass 20 can be accurately determined. That is, the through hole 23 having a desired shape can be easily obtained as compared with the case where the wall surface 23c of the through hole 23 is made of glass.
　また本実施の形態によれば、上述のエッチング工程を実施することにより、基材３０の切断と貫通孔２５の形成とを同時に行うことができる。また、同一の保護膜８１，８２を利用して塗布液２７を塗布するとともに塗布液２７を硬化させることによって、側面用補強部２６および孔用補強部２８の両方を効率良く形成することができる。このため、側面２０ｃおよび貫通孔２３の両方が適切に保護されたカバーガラス２０を少ない工数で作製することができる。 Further, according to the present embodiment, the substrate 30 can be cut and the through hole 25 can be formed simultaneously by performing the above-described etching process. In addition, by applying the coating liquid 27 using the same protective films 81 and 82 and curing the coating liquid 27, both the side reinforcing part 26 and the hole reinforcing part 28 can be efficiently formed. . For this reason, the cover glass 20 in which both the side surface 20c and the through hole 23 are appropriately protected can be manufactured with a small number of man-hours.
　なお、上述した第２の実施の形態に対して様々な変更を加えることが可能である。以下、図面を参照しながら、いくつかの変形例について説明する。以下の説明および以下の説明で用いる図面では、上述した第２の実施の形態と同様に構成され得る部分について、上述の第２の実施の形態における対応する部分に対して用いた符号と同一の符号を用いることとし、重複する説明を省略する。また、上述した第２の実施の形態において得られる作用効果が変形例においても得られることが明らかである場合、その説明を省略することもある。 It should be noted that various changes can be made to the above-described second embodiment. Hereinafter, some modifications will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following description and the drawings used in the following description, parts that can be configured in the same manner as in the above-described second embodiment are the same as those used for the corresponding parts in the above-described second embodiment. Reference numerals will be used, and redundant description will be omitted. In addition, when it is clear that the operational effects obtained in the above-described second embodiment can be obtained in the modified example, the description thereof may be omitted.
　（第１の変形例）
　上述の第２の本実施の形態においては、第２保護膜８２に孔８２ｂが形成される例を示した。しかしながら、これに限られることはなく、図２１Ａに示すように、第１保護膜８１には孔８１ｂが形成されるが、第２保護膜８２には孔が形成されないよう、第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２を設けてもよい。なお図示はしないが、図２１Ａに示す例においても、基材３０上の各区画間においては第２保護膜８２に上述の隙間８２ａが形成されている。 (First modification)
In the second embodiment described above, the example in which the hole 82b is formed in the second protective film 82 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 21A, the first protective film 81 is formed so that the hole 81b is formed in the first protective film 81 but the hole is not formed in the second protective film 82. In addition, a second protective film 82 may be provided. Although not shown, also in the example shown in FIG. 21A, the above-described gap 82 a is formed in the second protective film 82 between the sections on the base material 30.
　図２１Ａに示す第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２をレジストとして基材３０をウェットエッチングした場合について説明する。この場合、図２１Ｂに示すように、貫通孔２５が形成される場所において、単位基材２２は、第１保護膜８１をレジストとして第１面２２ａ側からウェットエッチングされることになる。このため図２１Ｂに示すように、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃは、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａに交わるとともに、単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂ側へ向かうにつれて貫通孔２５の中心側へ広がっていき、そして第２面２２ｂに交わる。また貫通孔２５は、単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂ側において第２保護膜８２によって封止されている。 A case will be described in which the substrate 30 is wet-etched using the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 shown in FIG. 21A as resists. In this case, as shown in FIG. 21B, the unit base material 22 is wet-etched from the first surface 22a side using the first protective film 81 as a resist at the place where the through hole 25 is formed. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 21B, the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 intersects the first surface 22a of the unit base member 22 and goes toward the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22. 25 spreads to the center side and intersects the second surface 22b. Further, the through hole 25 is sealed by the second protective film 82 on the second surface 22 b side of the unit base material 22.
　次に図２２Ａ～図２２Ｃを参照して、図２１Ｂに示す単位積層体３５の単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃに孔用補強部２８を設けるための工程について説明する。はじめに図２２Ａに示すように、封止された空間内に塗布液２７を塗布する孔用塗布工程を実施する。本実施の形態において、塗布液２７は、第２保護膜８２、貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃおよび第１保護膜８１によって囲われた空間内に塗布される。 Next, with reference to FIGS. 22A to 22C, a process for providing the hole reinforcing portion 28 on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 of the unit laminate body 35 shown in FIG. 21B will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 22A, a hole coating step of coating the coating liquid 27 in the sealed space is performed. In the present embodiment, the coating liquid 27 is applied in a space surrounded by the second protective film 82, the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25, and the first protective film 81.
　その後、上述の第２の実施の形態の場合と同様に、塗布液２７を硬化させて孔用補強部２８を得る孔用硬化工程を実施する。次に図２２Ｂに示すように、孔用補強部２８に、ドリルなどを用いた機械加工やレーザー加工などを施すことによって、孔用補強部２８に貫通孔２３を形成する樹脂材料加工工程を実施する。次に、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａ上の第１保護膜８１および単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂ上の第２保護膜８２を除去する。これによって、図２２Ｃに示すように、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ上に孔用補強部２８が設けられたカバーガラス２０を得ることができる。 Thereafter, as in the case of the second embodiment described above, a hole curing step is performed in which the coating liquid 27 is cured to obtain the hole reinforcing portion 28. Next, as shown in FIG. 22B, a resin material processing step for forming a through hole 23 in the hole reinforcing portion 28 is performed on the hole reinforcing portion 28 by machining or laser processing using a drill or the like. To do. Next, the first protective film 81 on the first surface 22a of the unit base 22 and the second protective film 82 on the second surface 22b of the unit base 22 are removed. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 22C, the cover glass 20 in which the hole reinforcing portion 28 is provided on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 can be obtained.
　本変形例によれば、単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂ上に設けられた第２保護膜８２が、塗布液２７が漏れ出るのを防ぐという役割、すなわち上述の第２の実施の形態における封止部材８５の役割を果たすことができる。従って、上述の第２の本実施の形態の場合に比べて、封止部材８５を設ける工程や封止部材８５を除去する工程などを削減することができる。このため、より少ない工数で、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ上に孔用補強部２８が設けられたカバーガラス２０を得ることができる。
　また本変形例によれば、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃが、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａ側から第２面２２ｂ側へ向かうにつれて貫通孔２５の中心側へ広がる形状を有する。このような壁面２５ｃの形状は、後述する第６の変形例のような、第１面２８ａ側の端部２８ａｅまたは第２面２８ｂ側の端部２８ｂｅのいずれか一方が削り落とされた孔用補強部２８に対する高い適合性を有している。 According to this modification, the role of the second protective film 82 provided on the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22 to prevent the coating liquid 27 from leaking out, that is, in the above-described second embodiment. It can serve as a sealing member 85. Therefore, the process of providing the sealing member 85, the process of removing the sealing member 85, and the like can be reduced compared to the case of the second embodiment described above. For this reason, the cover glass 20 in which the hole reinforcing portion 28 is provided on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 can be obtained with fewer man-hours.
Moreover, according to this modification, the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 has a shape that expands toward the center side of the through hole 25 from the first surface 22a side of the unit base material 22 toward the second surface 22b side. Have. The shape of the wall surface 25c is for holes in which one of the end portion 28ae on the first surface 28a side or the end portion 28be on the second surface 28b side is scraped off, as in a sixth modification described later. High compatibility with the reinforcing portion 28.
　なお本変形例においては、第１保護膜８１には孔８１ｂが形成されるが、第２保護膜８２には孔が形成されない例を示したが、これに限られることはない。図示はしないが、第２保護膜８２には孔が形成されるが、第１保護膜８１には孔が形成されないよう、第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２を設けてもよい。この場合、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃは、後述する図２９に示すように、単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂ側から第１面２２ａ側へ向かうにつれて貫通孔２５の中心側へ広がる形状を有するようになる。 In this modified example, the hole 81b is formed in the first protective film 81, but the hole is not formed in the second protective film 82, but the present invention is not limited to this. Although not shown, a hole is formed in the second protective film 82, but the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 may be provided so that no hole is formed in the first protective film 81. In this case, the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 is, as shown in FIG. 29 described later, the center side of the through hole 25 from the second surface 22b side of the unit base member 22 toward the first surface 22a side. It has a shape that spreads out.
（第２の変形例）
　上述の第２の実施の形態においては、第１保護膜８１や保護膜８１，８２をレジストとして基材３０や単位基材２２をウェットエッチングすることによって貫通孔２５が形成される例を示した。しかしながら、基材３０や単位基材２２に貫通孔２５を形成するための方法が、ウェットエッチングに限られることはない。例えば、ドリルなどを用いた機械加工や、レーザー加工などによって、基材３０や単位基材２２に貫通孔２５を形成してもよい。図２３Ａは、第１保護膜８１や保護膜８１，８２を利用することなく、機械加工やレーザー加工によって貫通孔２５が形成された単位基材２２を示す断面図である。 (Second modification)
In the second embodiment described above, an example in which the through hole 25 is formed by wet etching the base material 30 and the unit base material 22 using the first protective film 81 and the protective films 81 and 82 as a resist is shown. . However, the method for forming the through holes 25 in the base material 30 or the unit base material 22 is not limited to wet etching. For example, the through holes 25 may be formed in the base material 30 or the unit base material 22 by machining using a drill or the like, laser processing, or the like. FIG. 23A is a cross-sectional view showing the unit base material 22 in which the through holes 25 are formed by machining or laser processing without using the first protective film 81 or the protective films 81 and 82.
　なお、機械加工やレーザー加工によって貫通孔２５を形成する場合、貫通孔２５の周囲にマイクロクラックが発生することがある。この場合、貫通孔２５を形成した後に貫通孔２５の周囲をウェットエッチングしてマイクロクラックを除去してもよい。 Note that when the through hole 25 is formed by machining or laser processing, microcracks may be generated around the through hole 25. In this case, after the through holes 25 are formed, the micro cracks may be removed by wet etching around the through holes 25.
　本変形例においては、単位基材２２に貫通孔２５を形成した後、図２３Ｂに示すように、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５を封止する封止部材８５を単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂ上に設ける。その後、図２４Ａに示すように、封止された空間内に塗布液２７を塗布する孔用塗布工程を実施する。 In this modification, after the through hole 25 is formed in the unit base member 22, the sealing member 85 that seals the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 is used as the second base member 22 as shown in FIG. 23B. Provided on the surface 22b. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24A, a hole coating step of coating the coating liquid 27 in the sealed space is performed.
　この際、図２４Ａに示すように、塗布液２７は、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａ上に溢れ出ない程度に塗布されてもよい。この場合、塗布液２７をスキージなどを用いて掻きとる工程や、塗布液２７によって汚染された第１面２２ａを洗浄する工程などを不要にすることができる。好ましくは、塗布液２７は、貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃに露出している引張応力層２４ｂを少なくとも覆うように塗布される。これによって、壁面２５ｃに露出している引張応力層２４ｂを孔用補強部２８によって覆うことができ、このことにより、貫通孔２５をより確実に保護することができる。より好ましくは、図２４Ａに示すように、塗布液２７に働く表面張力によって、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａと塗布液２７の表面とが段差無く接続されるよう、塗布液２７が塗布される。これによって、塗布液２７から得られる孔用補強部２８の第１面２８ａと単位基材２２の第１面２８ａとの間に段差が生じることを抑制することができる。
　若しくは塗布液２７は、図示はしないが、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａ上に溢れ出る程度に塗布されてもよい。この場合、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａ上に溢れ出ている塗布液２７を、スキージなどを用いて掻きとる。これによって、塗布液２７の表面の位置を、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａの位置に一致させることができる。 At this time, as shown in FIG. 24A, the coating liquid 27 may be applied to the extent that it does not overflow on the first surface 22 a of the unit base member 22. In this case, a step of scraping off the coating liquid 27 using a squeegee or a step of cleaning the first surface 22a contaminated by the coating liquid 27 can be made unnecessary. Preferably, the coating liquid 27 is applied so as to cover at least the tensile stress layer 24 b exposed on the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25. As a result, the tensile stress layer 24b exposed on the wall surface 25c can be covered with the hole reinforcing portion 28, whereby the through hole 25 can be more reliably protected. More preferably, as shown in FIG. 24A, the coating liquid 27 is applied so that the first surface 22a of the unit base member 22 and the surface of the coating liquid 27 are connected without a step by the surface tension acting on the coating liquid 27. The As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a step between the first surface 28 a of the hole reinforcing portion 28 obtained from the coating liquid 27 and the first surface 28 a of the unit base material 22.
Alternatively, the coating liquid 27 may be applied to such an extent that it overflows onto the first surface 22a of the unit base material 22, although not shown. In this case, the coating liquid 27 overflowing on the first surface 22a of the unit base member 22 is scraped off using a squeegee or the like. Thereby, the position of the surface of the coating liquid 27 can be matched with the position of the first surface 22 a of the unit base material 22.
　その後、塗布液２７を硬化させて孔用補強部２８を得る孔用硬化工程を実施する。次に、孔用補強部２８を加工して孔用補強部２８に貫通孔２３を形成する樹脂材料加工工程を実施する。これによって、図２４Ｂに示すように、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ上に孔用補強部２８が設けられたカバーガラス２０を得ることができる。 Thereafter, a hole hardening step for hardening the coating liquid 27 to obtain the hole reinforcing portion 28 is performed. Next, a resin material processing step of processing the hole reinforcing portion 28 to form the through hole 23 in the hole reinforcing portion 28 is performed. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 24B, the cover glass 20 in which the hole reinforcing portion 28 is provided on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 can be obtained.
（第３の変形例）
　上述の第２の変形例においては、機械加工やレーザー加工によって単位基材２２や基材３０に貫通孔２５が形成され、かつ、第１保護膜８１や保護膜８１，８２を利用することなく塗布液２７が貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ上に塗布される例を示した。しかしながら、機械加工やレーザー加工によって単位基材２２や基材３０に貫通孔２５を形成した上で、上述の本実施の形態や第１の変形例の場合と同様に、第１保護膜８１や保護膜８１，８２を利用して塗布液２７を塗布して孔用補強部２８を形成してもよい。 (Third Modification)
In the second modified example described above, the through holes 25 are formed in the unit base material 22 or the base material 30 by machining or laser processing, and the first protective film 81 or the protective films 81 and 82 are not used. An example in which the coating liquid 27 is applied onto the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 is shown. However, after the through holes 25 are formed in the unit base material 22 or the base material 30 by machining or laser processing, the first protective film 81 or the like, as in the case of the above-described embodiment or the first modification example, The hole reinforcing portion 28 may be formed by applying the coating liquid 27 using the protective films 81 and 82.
　例えば、はじめに、機械加工やレーザー加工によって貫通孔２５が形成された単位基材２２を準備し、次に図２５Ａに示すように、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａ上および第２面２２ｂ上にそれぞれ第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２を設ける。この際、第１保護膜８１のうち貫通孔２５に対応する位置には孔８１ｂが形成されている。また第１保護膜８１の孔８１ｂの壁面８１ｄは、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃよりも、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の中心側に位置している。この場合、好ましくは、図２５Ｂに示すように、塗布液２７は、塗布液２７が少なくとも部分的に第１保護膜８１の底面８１ｅに接するようになるまで、封止された空間内に塗布される。これによって、図２５Ｃに示すように、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａおよび第２面２２ｂとの間に段差が存在しないまたはほとんど存在していない第１面２８ａおよび第２面２８ｂを有する孔用補強部２８を形成することができる。 For example, first, the unit base material 22 in which the through holes 25 are formed by machining or laser processing is prepared, and then, as shown in FIG. 25A, on the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base material 22. Are provided with a first protective film 81 and a second protective film 82, respectively. At this time, a hole 81 b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 25 in the first protective film 81. The wall surface 81 d of the hole 81 b of the first protective film 81 is located closer to the center of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 than the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22. In this case, preferably, as shown in FIG. 25B, the coating liquid 27 is applied in the sealed space until the coating liquid 27 comes into contact with the bottom surface 81e of the first protective film 81 at least partially. The As a result, as shown in FIG. 25C, there is a hole having the first surface 28a and the second surface 28b in which there is no or almost no step between the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base material 22. The reinforcing portion 28 can be formed.
（第４の変形例）
　上述の第２の実施の形態および各変形例においては、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃに引張応力層２４ｂが露出している例を示した。しかしながら、これに限られることはなく、図２６に示すように、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃが圧縮応力層２４ａによって構成されていてもよい。この場合であっても、カバーガラス２０に衝撃が加えられた場合に単位基材２２の貫通孔２５に伝わる力を緩和するためには、上述の第２の実施の形態および各変形例の場合と同様に、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ上に孔用補強部２８を設けることが有効である。 (Fourth modification)
In the above-described second embodiment and each modification, the example in which the tensile stress layer 24b is exposed on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 has been shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 26, the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 may be constituted by the compressive stress layer 24a. Even in this case, in order to relieve the force transmitted to the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 when an impact is applied to the cover glass 20, the case of the above-described second embodiment and each modification example Similarly, it is effective to provide the hole reinforcing portion 28 on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22.
（第５の変形例）
　上述の第２の実施の形態においては、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃが、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の中心側へ突出した凸形状を有する例を示した。しかしながら、これに限られることはなく、貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃは、図２７に示すように、貫通孔２５の中心とは反対側に向かって凹んだ凹形状を有していてもよい。この場合であっても、上述の第２の実施の形態の場合と同様に貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ上に孔用補強部２８を形成することにより、貫通孔２５を適切に保護することができる。 (Fifth modification)
In the second embodiment described above, an example in which the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 has a convex shape protruding toward the center of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 may have a concave shape that is recessed toward the side opposite to the center of the through hole 25 as shown in FIG. Even in this case, the through hole 25 can be appropriately protected by forming the hole reinforcing portion 28 on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 as in the case of the second embodiment described above. .
（第６の変形例）
　上述の第２の実施の形態および各変形例において、塗布液２７を硬化させることによって孔用補強部２８を得た後、孔用補強部２８の側面２８ｃを加工することにより、孔用補強部２８の側面２８ｃの形状、すなわちカバーガラス２０の貫通孔２３の壁面２３ｃの形状を整えてもよい。これによって、貫通孔２３の見栄えを向上させることができる。ここで、孔用補強部２８は上述のように樹脂材料によって構成されているので、カバーガラス２０の貫通孔２３の壁面２３ｃが強化ガラスによって構成されている場合に比べて、カバーガラス２０の貫通孔２３の壁面２３ｃを加工して所望の形状を得ることがより容易である。また、加工に起因する強度の低下やマイクロクラックの発生が生じにくい。加工方法としては例えば、研磨機を用いた加工を採用することができる。 (Sixth Modification)
In the second embodiment and each modification described above, the hole reinforcing portion 28 is obtained by curing the coating liquid 27, and then the side surface 28c of the hole reinforcing portion 28 is processed to obtain the hole reinforcing portion. The shape of the side surface 28c of 28, that is, the shape of the wall surface 23c of the through hole 23 of the cover glass 20 may be adjusted. Thereby, the appearance of the through-hole 23 can be improved. Here, since the hole reinforcing portion 28 is formed of the resin material as described above, the cover glass 20 penetrates more than the case where the wall surface 23c of the through hole 23 of the cover glass 20 is formed of tempered glass. It is easier to process the wall surface 23c of the hole 23 to obtain a desired shape. In addition, strength reduction and microcracks are less likely to occur due to processing. As a processing method, for example, processing using a polishing machine can be employed.
　例えば図２８に示すように、孔用補強部２８の第１面２８ａ側の端部２８ａｅおよび第２面２８ｂ側の端部２８ｂｅの両方を削り落とすよう、孔用補強部２８の側面２８ｃを加工してもよい。図２８に示す例においては、孔用補強部２８の側面２８ｃのうち第１面２８ａと交わる部分および第２面２８ｂと交わる部分の両方が、丸面に加工されている。なお図２８においては、側面２８ｃが丸面となるよう側面２８ｃが加工される例が示されているが、これに限られることはなく、図示はしないが、側面２８ｃが角面となるよう側面２８ｃが加工されてもよい。 For example, as shown in FIG. 28, the side surface 28c of the hole reinforcing portion 28 is processed so that both the end portion 28ae on the first surface 28a side and the end portion 28be on the second surface 28b side of the hole reinforcing portion 28 are scraped off. May be. In the example shown in FIG. 28, both of the side surface 28c of the hole reinforcing portion 28 that intersects the first surface 28a and the portion that intersects the second surface 28b are processed into round surfaces. FIG. 28 shows an example in which the side surface 28c is processed so that the side surface 28c becomes a round surface. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although not shown, the side surface 28c becomes a square surface. 28c may be processed.
　その他にも、図２９に示すように、孔用補強部２８の第１面２８ａ側の端部２８ａｅおよび第２面２８ｂ側の端部２８ｂｅのうちの一方、例えば第２面２８ｂ側の端部２８ｂｅを少なくとも削り落とすよう、孔用補強部２８の側面２８ｃを加工してもよい。図２９に示す例においては、孔用補強部２８の側面２８ｃのうち第２面２８ｂと交わる部分が、丸面に加工されている。また、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ上に設けられる側面用補強部２６に関しても、同様の丸面の加工が施されていてもよい。この場合、カバーガラス２０の第２面２０ｂ側が広域にわたって丸みを帯びているような印象を与えることができる。 In addition, as shown in FIG. 29, one of the end portion 28ae on the first surface 28a side and the end portion 28be on the second surface 28b side of the hole reinforcing portion 28, for example, the end portion on the second surface 28b side. You may process the side surface 28c of the hole reinforcement part 28 so that 28be may be scraped off at least. In the example shown in FIG. 29, a portion of the side surface 28c of the hole reinforcing portion 28 that intersects the second surface 28b is processed into a round surface. Further, the side surface reinforcing portion 26 provided on the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 may be similarly processed with a round surface. In this case, an impression that the second surface 20b side of the cover glass 20 is rounded over a wide area can be given.
（第７の変形例）
　上述の第２の実施の形態および各変形例においては、単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂ上に設けられた第２保護膜８２または封止部材８５によって封止された空間内に塗布液２７が塗布される例を示した。しかしながら、高い粘性を有する塗布液２７が用いられる場合、そのような封止された空間を形成することなく、塗布液２７を単位基材２２の貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ上に塗布してもよい。例えば、図３０に示すように、貫通孔２５が上下方向に延びるように単位積層体３５を保持した状態で、貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ、第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２によって囲われた空間内に塗布液２７を塗布してもよい。若しくは、図３１に示すように、第１保護膜８１や第２保護膜８２を設けることなく、貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ上に塗布液２７を塗布してもよい。これらの場合であっても、塗布液２７が十分な粘性を有していれば、塗布液２７が貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ上に留まるので、壁面２５ｃ上に孔用補強部２８を形成することができる。 (Seventh Modification)
In the second embodiment and the modifications described above, the coating liquid 27 is placed in the space sealed by the second protective film 82 or the sealing member 85 provided on the second surface 22b of the unit base member 22. An example in which is applied is shown. However, when the coating liquid 27 having high viscosity is used, the coating liquid 27 may be applied onto the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 of the unit base material 22 without forming such a sealed space. . For example, as shown in FIG. 30, the unit laminated body 35 is held so that the through hole 25 extends in the vertical direction, and is surrounded by the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25, the first protective film 81, and the second protective film 82. The coating liquid 27 may be applied in the remaining space. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 31, the coating liquid 27 may be applied on the wall surface 25 c of the through hole 25 without providing the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82. Even in these cases, if the coating liquid 27 has sufficient viscosity, the coating liquid 27 stays on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25, so that the hole reinforcing portion 28 is formed on the wall surface 25c. Can do.
　また本変形例によれば、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５を塞がないように壁面２５ｃ上に塗布液２７を塗布することができる。このため、上述の樹脂材料加工工程を実施することなく、貫通孔２３が形成された孔用補強部２８を得ることができる。 Further, according to this modification, the coating liquid 27 can be applied on the wall surface 25c so as not to block the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22. For this reason, the hole reinforcement part 28 in which the through-hole 23 was formed can be obtained, without implementing the above-mentioned resin material processing process.
　本変形例において用いられる塗布液２７の粘度は、塗布液２７が硬化するまで塗布液２７が壁面２５ｃ上に留まることができるよう設定されている。例えば、塗布液２７の粘度は２０～５０Ｐａ・ｓの範囲内になっている。 The viscosity of the coating liquid 27 used in this modification is set so that the coating liquid 27 can remain on the wall surface 25c until the coating liquid 27 is cured. For example, the viscosity of the coating liquid 27 is in the range of 20 to 50 Pa · s.
（第８の変形例）
　本変形例においては、カバーガラス２０が、表示装置１５を保護するという役割だけでなく、タッチパネル機能をも果たすように構成されている例について説明する。具体的には、カバーガラス２０の表示装置１５側の第１面２０ａには、上述の第１の実施の形態の場合と同様に、外部導体の接近や接触を検知するためのセンサ電極を含むタッチパネルセンサ部４０が設けられている。またカバーガラス２０の第１面２０ａの非アクティブエリアＡａ２には、所望の色を呈するための加飾部６０がさらに設けられていてもよい。図３２は、カバーガラス２０の第１面２０ａに設けられたタッチパネルセンサ部４０を示す図である。なお図３２においては、説明の便宜上、加飾部６０が省略されている。 (Eighth modification)
In this modification, an example in which the cover glass 20 is configured to perform not only a role of protecting the display device 15 but also a touch panel function will be described. Specifically, the first surface 20a on the display device 15 side of the cover glass 20 includes a sensor electrode for detecting the approach or contact of the external conductor, as in the case of the first embodiment described above. A touch panel sensor unit 40 is provided. In addition, the non-active area Aa2 of the first surface 20a of the cover glass 20 may be further provided with a decorating unit 60 for exhibiting a desired color. FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating the touch panel sensor unit 40 provided on the first surface 20 a of the cover glass 20. In FIG. 32, the decorating unit 60 is omitted for convenience of explanation.
　以下、図３２を参照して、カバーガラス２０の第１面２０ａに設けられたタッチパネルセンサ部４０について説明する。図３２は、カバーガラス２０を第１面２０ａ側から見た場合を示す平面図である。なお図３２においては、説明の便宜上、加飾部６０が省略されている。タッチパネルセンサ部４０の構成は、上述の第１の実施の形態におけるタッチパネルセンサ部４０の構成と同一であるため、詳細な説明を省略する。 Hereinafter, the touch panel sensor unit 40 provided on the first surface 20a of the cover glass 20 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a plan view showing the cover glass 20 as viewed from the first surface 20a side. In FIG. 32, the decorating unit 60 is omitted for convenience of explanation. Since the configuration of the touch panel sensor unit 40 is the same as the configuration of the touch panel sensor unit 40 in the first embodiment described above, detailed description thereof is omitted.
　次に図３３および図３４を参照して、カバーガラス２０の第１面２０ａに設けられた加飾部６０について説明する。図３３および図３４はそれぞれ、図３２に示すカバーガラス２０の線XXXIIIおよび線XXXIVに沿った断面図である。 Next, with reference to FIG. 33 and FIG. 34, the decoration part 60 provided in the 1st surface 20a of the cover glass 20 is demonstrated. 33 and 34 are cross-sectional views taken along line XXXIII and line XXXIV of cover glass 20 shown in FIG. 32, respectively.
　図３３および図３４に示すように、非アクティブエリアＡａ２には、加飾部６０が、取出配線４３よりも観察者側に位置するよう配置されている。この場合、加飾部６０が、観察者側からカバーガラス２０を介して視認されることになる。すなわち、カバーガラス付き表示装置１０において、非アクティブエリアＡａ２の見え方は、加飾部６０およびその周辺の構成要素によって決定されることになる。 As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the inactive area Aa2, the decoration portion 60 is arranged so as to be positioned closer to the observer side than the extraction wiring 43. In this case, the decoration part 60 is visually recognized through the cover glass 20 from the observer side. That is, in the display device 10 with the cover glass, the appearance of the inactive area Aa2 is determined by the decorating unit 60 and its peripheral components.
　加飾部６０の色は、上述の第１の実施の形態の場合と同様に、カバーガラス付き表示装置１０に対して求められる意匠性に応じて選択される。なお図３４に示すように、加飾部６０のうち貫通孔２３と重なる部分には孔６１が形成される。 The color of the decoration part 60 is selected according to the design property calculated | required with respect to the display apparatus 10 with a cover glass similarly to the case of the above-mentioned 1st Embodiment. As shown in FIG. 34, a hole 61 is formed in a portion of the decorative portion 60 that overlaps the through hole 23.
　なお図３４においては、加飾部６０が、カバーガラス２０の法線方向に沿って見た場合に側面用補強部２６および孔用補強部２８と重なるよう設けられている例が示されているが、これに限られることはない。例えば図３５に示すように、加飾部６０は、カバーガラス２０の法線方向に沿って見た場合に側面用補強部２６および孔用補強部２８と重ならないよう設けられていてもよい。また、図示はしないが、側面用補強部２６および孔用補強部２８は、カバーガラス２０の法線方向に沿って見た場合に加飾部６０と部分的にのみ重なっていてもよい。 Note that FIG. 34 shows an example in which the decorative portion 60 is provided so as to overlap the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 when viewed along the normal direction of the cover glass 20. However, it is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 35, the decorative portion 60 may be provided so as not to overlap the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 when viewed along the normal direction of the cover glass 20. Although not shown, the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 may partially overlap the decorating portion 60 when viewed along the normal direction of the cover glass 20.
　本変形例においては、カバーガラス２０の製造工程において、加飾部６０やタッチパネルセンサ部４０などの要素部７０を形成する要素部形成工程が実施される。要素部形成工程を実施するタイミングが特に限られることはなく、様々なバリエーションが考えられる。
　例えば、基材３０に第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２を設ける上述の保護膜形成工程に先行して要素部形成工程を実施してもよい。この場合、第１保護膜８１は、エッチング工程の際、基材３０の第１面３０ａを保護するという役割だけでなく、基材３０の第１面３０ａ上に設けられている要素部７０を保護するという役割も果たすことになる。
　若しくは、第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２をレジストとして基材３０をウェットエッチングして単位基材２２を得た後に、単位基材２２の第１面２２ａ上に要素部７０を設ける要素部形成工程を実施してもよい。この場合、側面用補強部２６や孔用補強部２８を形成するために塗布液２７を塗布する工程などは、要素部形成工程に先行して実施されてもよく、要素部形成工程の後に実施されてもよい。 In this modification, in the manufacturing process of the cover glass 20, the element part formation process which forms the element parts 70, such as the decorating part 60 and the touchscreen sensor part 40, is implemented. There is no particular limitation on the timing of performing the element part forming step, and various variations are conceivable.
For example, the element part forming step may be performed prior to the above-described protective film forming step in which the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 are provided on the substrate 30. In this case, the first protective film 81 not only serves to protect the first surface 30a of the base material 30 during the etching process, but also includes the element portion 70 provided on the first surface 30a of the base material 30. It will also play a role of protection.
Alternatively, the element 30 is provided on the first surface 22a of the unit base material 22 after the base material 30 is wet-etched by using the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 as resists to obtain the unit base material 22. You may implement a part formation process. In this case, the step of applying the coating liquid 27 to form the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 may be performed prior to the element portion forming step or after the element portion forming step. May be.
　好ましくは、側面用補強部２６や孔用補強部２８は、加飾部６０と同色を呈するよう構成されている。例えば側面用補強部２６や孔用補強部２８は、加飾部６０に含まれている着色顔料と同色の着色顔料を含んでいても良い。この場合、側面用補強部２６や孔用補強部２８のうちカバーガラス２０の法線方向から見て加飾部６０と重なっていない領域が、加飾部６０と同色の領域として視認されることになる。このため、意匠上の効果を生じさせることができる領域を拡大することができる。
　一般に加飾部６０は、樹脂材料および顔料を含む塗布液を単位基材２２上に塗布することによって形成される。一方、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ近傍や貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ近傍に塗布液を正確に塗布することは容易ではない。
　ここで、側面用補強部２６や孔用補強部２８が上述のように着色されている場合、加飾部６０を単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ近傍や貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ近傍にまで設けることなく、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ近傍や貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ近傍の領域に意匠上の効果を生じさせることができる。このため、加飾部６０を設ける工程に要求される難易度を軽減することができる。 Preferably, the side reinforcing part 26 and the hole reinforcing part 28 are configured to exhibit the same color as the decorative part 60. For example, the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 may include a color pigment having the same color as the color pigment included in the decorative portion 60. In this case, an area of the side reinforcing part 26 and the hole reinforcing part 28 that does not overlap with the decorative part 60 when viewed from the normal direction of the cover glass 20 is visually recognized as an area of the same color as the decorative part 60. become. For this reason, the area | region which can produce the effect on a design can be expanded.
Generally, the decorating unit 60 is formed by applying a coating liquid containing a resin material and a pigment on the unit base material 22. On the other hand, it is not easy to accurately apply the coating liquid to the vicinity of the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 and the vicinity of the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25.
Here, when the side reinforcing part 26 and the hole reinforcing part 28 are colored as described above, the decorative part 60 is provided to the vicinity of the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 and the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25. The design effect can be produced in the vicinity of the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 and the region in the vicinity of the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25. For this reason, the difficulty required for the process of providing the decorating part 60 can be reduced.
　なお上述の本変形例においては、タッチパネルセンサ部４０および加飾部６０の両方がカバーガラス２０に含まれる例を示したが、これに限られることはない。例えば、図示はしないが、カバーガラス２０は、タッチパネルセンサ部４０を含むが加飾部６０を含んでいなくてもよい。若しくは、カバーガラス２０は、加飾部６０を含むがタッチパネルセンサ部４０を含んでいなくてもよい。 In the above-described modification, the example in which both the touch panel sensor unit 40 and the decoration unit 60 are included in the cover glass 20 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, although not shown, the cover glass 20 includes the touch panel sensor unit 40 but may not include the decorating unit 60. Alternatively, the cover glass 20 includes the decorating unit 60 but may not include the touch panel sensor unit 40.
　また上述の本変形例においては、側面用補強部２６や孔用補強部２８の色が加飾部６０の色と同一である例を示したが、これに限られることはなく、側面用補強部２６や孔用補強部２８は、加飾部６０とは異なる色を呈するよう構成されていてもよい。また、加飾部６０が設けられていない場合に、側面用補強部２６や孔用補強部２８が所定の色を呈するように構成されていてもよい。この場合、加飾部６０が設けられていなくても、側面用補強部２６や孔用補強部２８によって、光漏れ防止などの意匠性の向上を実現することができる。 In the above-described modification, the color of the side reinforcing part 26 and the hole reinforcing part 28 is the same as the color of the decorative part 60. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the side reinforcing part The part 26 and the hole reinforcing part 28 may be configured to exhibit a color different from that of the decorative part 60. Moreover, when the decoration part 60 is not provided, the side reinforcement part 26 and the hole reinforcement part 28 may be configured to exhibit a predetermined color. In this case, even if the decorative portion 60 is not provided, the side face reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 can improve design such as prevention of light leakage.
　また上述の本変形例や、上述の第１の実施の形態においては、タッチパネルセンサ部４０のセンサ電極４１，４２のパターンとして、いわゆるダイヤモンドパターンが採用されている例を示したが、これに限られることはない。所望の感度や分解能でタッチ位置を検出することができる限りにおいて、様々なタイプのパターンからなるセンサ電極４１，４２を採用することができる。 Further, in the above-described modified example and the above-described first embodiment, an example in which a so-called diamond pattern is employed as the pattern of the sensor electrodes 41 and 42 of the touch panel sensor unit 40 has been described. It will never be done. As long as the touch position can be detected with desired sensitivity and resolution, the sensor electrodes 41 and 42 having various types of patterns can be employed.
　また上述の本変形例や、上述の第１の実施の形態においては、タッチパネルセンサ部４０のセンサ電極４１，４２を構成する材料として、透光性を有する透明導電性材料が用いられる例を示したが、これに限られることはない。例えばセンサ電極４１，４２として、銀合金や銅などの不透過性の導電性材料を網目状に配置した金属細線からなる、いわゆるメッシュセンサタイプのものを採用することもできる。 Moreover, in the above-described modified example and the above-described first embodiment, an example in which a transparent conductive material having translucency is used as a material constituting the sensor electrodes 41 and 42 of the touch panel sensor unit 40 is shown. However, it is not limited to this. For example, as the sensor electrodes 41 and 42, a so-called mesh sensor type composed of fine metal wires in which an impermeable conductive material such as a silver alloy or copper is arranged in a mesh shape may be employed.
（第９の変形例）
　上述の第２の実施の形態および各変形例において、単位基材２２の貫通孔２５が第２面２２ｂ側で第２保護膜８２または封止部材８５によって封止された状態で、封止された空間内に塗布液２７が塗布される例を示した。しかしながら、これに限られることはなく、塗布液２７が硬化するまで塗布液２７が貫通孔２５の壁面２５ｃ上に留まることができる限りにおいて、貫通孔２５が第２面２２ｂ側で強固に封止されている必要はない。例えば、第１面２２ａ側から塗布された塗布液２７は、貫通孔２５を通って第２面２２ｂ側から漏れ出てもよい。なお、塗布液２７によって単位基材２２の第２面２２ｂが汚染された場合、孔用補強部２８を形成した後に第２面２２ｂを洗浄してもよい。第２面２２ｂが汚染されることを防ぐという点を考慮すれば、貫通孔２５が第２面２２ｂ側で強固に封止されていることが好ましい。 (Ninth Modification)
In the second embodiment and each modification described above, the through hole 25 of the unit base member 22 is sealed in a state where it is sealed by the second protective film 82 or the sealing member 85 on the second surface 22b side. In this example, the coating liquid 27 is applied in the space. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the coating liquid 27 can remain on the wall surface 25c of the through hole 25 until the coating liquid 27 is cured, the through hole 25 is firmly sealed on the second surface 22b side. There is no need to be. For example, the coating liquid 27 applied from the first surface 22a side may leak from the second surface 22b side through the through hole 25. In addition, when the 2nd surface 22b of the unit base material 22 is contaminated with the coating liquid 27, after forming the hole reinforcement part 28, you may wash | clean the 2nd surface 22b. Considering that the second surface 22b is prevented from being contaminated, it is preferable that the through hole 25 is firmly sealed on the second surface 22b side.
（第１０の変形例）
　上述の第２の実施の形態および各変形例において、孔用補強部２８を加工して貫通孔２３を形成する樹脂材料加工工程が実施された後、第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２が除去される例を示した。しかしながら、これに限られることはなく、樹脂材料加工工程を実施するより前に、第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２を除去してもよい。なお、孔用補強部２８を加工して貫通孔２３を形成する際に発生する削りかすなどから単位基材２２の第１面２２ａおよび第２面２２ｂを保護するという点を考慮すると、樹脂材料加工工程を実施した後に第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２を除去することが好ましいと言える。 (10th modification)
In the second embodiment and the modifications described above, the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 are formed after the resin material processing step for forming the through hole 23 by processing the hole reinforcing portion 28 is performed. An example in which is removed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 may be removed before the resin material processing step is performed. In view of protecting the first surface 22a and the second surface 22b of the unit base material 22 from shavings or the like generated when the hole reinforcing portion 28 is processed to form the through hole 23, the resin material It can be said that it is preferable to remove the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 after performing the processing steps.
（第１１の変形例）
　上述の各実施の形態および各変形例において、側面用補強部２６や孔用補強部２８は、カバーガラス２０が帯電することを抑制するよう構成されていてもよい。例えば側面用補強部２６や孔用補強部２８は、導電性粒子を含んでいてもよい。これによって、側面用補強部２６、孔用補強部２８や単位基材２２が帯電してしまうことを抑制することができ、このことにより、静電破壊が生じてしまうことを抑制することができる。側面用補強部２６や孔用補強部２８に添加される導電性粒子としては、例えばカーボンブラックからなる粒子を挙げることができる。導電性粒子は、好ましくは、側面用補強部２６や孔用補強部２８の表面抵抗が１０５～１０８Ω／□の範囲内になるよう、添加される。 (Eleventh modification)
In each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 may be configured to suppress the cover glass 20 from being charged. For example, the side reinforcing part 26 and the hole reinforcing part 28 may contain conductive particles. Thereby, it can suppress that the side reinforcement part 26, the hole reinforcement part 28, and the unit base material 22 are charged, and it can suppress that electrostatic breakdown arises by this. . Examples of the conductive particles added to the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 include particles made of carbon black. The conductive particles are preferably added so that the surface resistance of the side reinforcing portion 26 and the hole reinforcing portion 28 is in the range of 10 5 to 10 8 Ω / □.
（第１２の変形例）
　上述の各実施の形態および各変形例において、塗布液２７が硬化する際の収縮を小さくするため、塗布液２７に含まれる樹脂材料にフィラーを添加してもよい。フィラーは樹脂材料に比べて熱に起因する収縮の程度が小さいので、フィラーを添加することにより、塗布液２７が硬化して側面用補強部２６や孔用補強部２８となる際の全体的な収縮の程度を小さくすることができる。フィラーとしては、カーボンブラックの粒子などを挙げることができる。なおフィラーを添加すると、フィラーによって光が遮られることに起因して、光硬化性樹脂の重合反応が妨げられ、このため硬化が十分に進まないことが考えられる。このような課題を考慮し、塗布液２７に含まれる樹脂材料に熱硬化性樹脂をさらに添加しておいてもよい。 (Twelfth modification)
In each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, a filler may be added to the resin material contained in the coating liquid 27 in order to reduce shrinkage when the coating liquid 27 is cured. Since the filler has a smaller degree of shrinkage due to heat than the resin material, by adding the filler, the coating liquid 27 is cured to form the entire side reinforcing portion 26 or hole reinforcing portion 28. The degree of shrinkage can be reduced. Examples of the filler include carbon black particles. If a filler is added, the light is blocked by the filler, which hinders the polymerization reaction of the photocurable resin, and it is considered that the curing does not proceed sufficiently. In consideration of such problems, a thermosetting resin may be further added to the resin material included in the coating liquid 27.
（第１３の変形例）
　上述の各実施の形態および各変形例において、粘着層を介して二軸延伸ポリプロピレンや無延伸ポリプロピレンのシートを基材３０に貼り付けることにより、保護膜８１，８２が構成される例を示した。しかしながら、保護膜８１，８２の形成方法が特に限られることはない。例えば、感光性レジストフィルムを基材３０の第１面３０ａ上および第２面３０ｂ上にそれぞれ貼り合わせ、その後に感光性レジストフィルムに、フォトマスクなどを用いて所望の形状に応じて紫外線などの光を照射し、酸性液またはアルカリ性液、または有機溶剤などの現像液でパターニングすることにより、基材３０に保護膜８１，８２を設けることができる。 (13th modification)
In each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, examples in which the protective films 81 and 82 are configured by sticking a biaxially stretched polypropylene sheet or an unstretched polypropylene sheet to the base material 30 through the adhesive layer are shown. . However, the method for forming the protective films 81 and 82 is not particularly limited. For example, a photosensitive resist film is bonded to each of the first surface 30a and the second surface 30b of the substrate 30, and then the photosensitive resist film is irradiated with ultraviolet rays or the like according to a desired shape using a photomask or the like. The protective films 81 and 82 can be provided on the substrate 30 by irradiating light and patterning with a developing solution such as an acidic solution, an alkaline solution, or an organic solvent.
　なお、上述した各実施の形態に対するいくつかの変形例を説明してきたが、当然に、複数の変形例を適宜組み合わせて適用することも可能である。 In addition, although several modifications with respect to each embodiment mentioned above have been demonstrated, naturally, it is also possible to apply a combination of a plurality of modifications appropriately.
　次に、本発明を実施例により更に具体的に説明するが、本発明はその要旨を超えない限り、以下の実施例の記載に限定されるものではない。 Next, the present invention will be described more specifically with reference to examples. However, the present invention is not limited to the description of the following examples unless it exceeds the gist.
　（実施例１）
　上述の図７Ａ乃至図７Ｄに示す方法を用いて、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ上に補強部２６を形成した。補強部２６を構成するための材料としては、アクリル系樹脂、エポキシ系樹脂およびポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂の３種類を用いた。アクリル系樹脂としては、東亞合成株式会社製のＵＶ－３３００を用いた。エポキシ系樹脂としては、株式会社スリーボンド製のＴＢ３１１４を用いた。またポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂としては、積水化学工業株式会社製のフォトレックＡ－７８４を用いた。 Example 1
The reinforcing portion 26 was formed on the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22 using the method shown in FIGS. 7A to 7D described above. As a material for constituting the reinforcing portion 26, three kinds of materials such as an acrylic resin, an epoxy resin, and a polyene-polythiol resin were used. UV-3300 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd. was used as the acrylic resin. As the epoxy resin, TB3114 manufactured by ThreeBond Co., Ltd. was used. As the polyene-polythiol resin, Photorec A-784 manufactured by Sekisui Chemical Co., Ltd. was used.
　はじめに、第１保護膜８１および第２保護膜８２が設けられた単位基材２２を３つ準備した。単位基材２２としては、板厚０．７ｍｍのアルミノシリケートガラスの表面に、化学強化により厚み２４μｍの圧縮応力層を付与したものを用いた。次に、上述の図７Ａに示すようにして、単位基材２２の側面２２ｃ上に、上述の３種類の樹脂のいずれかを含む塗布液２７をそれぞれ塗布した。その後、塗布液２７に対して光を照射することにより塗布液２７を硬化させ、これによって補強部２６を得た。なお、塗布液２７の粘度、および塗布液２７を硬化させる条件としては、塗布液２７に含まれる樹脂材料を提供する材料メーカーが推奨する条件を採用した。 First, three unit base materials 22 provided with the first protective film 81 and the second protective film 82 were prepared. As the unit base material 22, a surface of 0.7 mm thick aluminosilicate glass provided with a 24 μm thick compressive stress layer by chemical strengthening was used. Next, as shown in FIG. 7A described above, the coating liquid 27 containing any one of the above-described three types of resins was applied to the side surface 22c of the unit base material 22, respectively. Thereafter, the coating liquid 27 was cured by irradiating light to the coating liquid 27, thereby obtaining the reinforcing portion 26. As the viscosity of the coating liquid 27 and the conditions for curing the coating liquid 27, the conditions recommended by the material manufacturer that provides the resin material contained in the coating liquid 27 were adopted.
　得られた補強部２６の側面２６ｃを手で触って、べたつきを感じるかどうかを評価した。結果、エポキシ系樹脂およびポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂から構成された補強部２６に関しては、べたつきが感じられなかった。一方、アクリル系樹脂から構成された補強部２６に関しては、べたつきが感じられた。 The side face 26c of the obtained reinforcing part 26 was touched with a hand to evaluate whether or not it was sticky. As a result, no stickiness was felt with respect to the reinforcing portion 26 composed of the epoxy resin and the polyene-polythiol resin. On the other hand, stickiness was felt with respect to the reinforcing portion 26 made of acrylic resin.
　補強部２６の側面２６ｃは、硬化する際に大気などの外部環境に対して露出している部分である。従って、アクリル系樹脂を用いた場合は、重合反応が酸素によって阻害され、この結果、補強部２６の側面２６ｃが未硬化のままで残っていたと考えられる。一方、ポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂の重合反応が酸素によって阻害される程度は、アクリル系樹脂の場合に比べて小さい。このため、ポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂から構成された補強部２６においては、その側面２６ｃがべたつくことを防ぐことができたと考えられる。 The side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 is a portion that is exposed to an external environment such as the atmosphere when cured. Therefore, when the acrylic resin is used, it is considered that the polymerization reaction is inhibited by oxygen, and as a result, the side surface 26c of the reinforcing portion 26 remains uncured. On the other hand, the degree to which the polymerization reaction of the polyene-polythiol resin is inhibited by oxygen is smaller than that of the acrylic resin. For this reason, it is considered that the reinforcing portion 26 made of the polyene-polythiol resin could prevent the side surface 26c from sticking.
　（実施例２）
　実施例１で用いた上述の３種類の樹脂の印刷適性を評価した。具体的には、はじめに、図３６（ａ）に示すように、ガラス板９０を準備した。次に図３６（ｂ）に示すように、ガラス板９０上に、上述の３種類の樹脂のいずれかを含む塗布液を塗布し、その後、塗布液を硬化させ、これによってガラス板９０上に樹脂層９１を形成した。次に図３６（ｃ）に示すように、異なる表面張力を有するように設定された複数種類のインキを樹脂層９１上に印刷することによって、樹脂層９１上に印刷パターン９２ａ～９２ｆを設けた。ここでは、印刷パターン９２ａ～９２ｆを、３２，３４，３６，３８，４０，４２ｍＮ／ｍの表面張力を有するインキによってそれぞれ構成した。このようなインキを樹脂層９１に印刷するための手段としては、Corona Supplies Ltd.製の「JUMBO SURFACE TENSION TEST PENS」の、＃３２，３４，３６，３８，４０，４２のセットを用いた。＃の後の数字は、ペンに含まれるインキの表面張力（単位はｍＮ／ｍ）を表している。 (Example 2)
The printability of the above-mentioned three types of resins used in Example 1 was evaluated. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 36A, a glass plate 90 was prepared. Next, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), a coating liquid containing any of the above-mentioned three types of resins is applied on the glass plate 90, and then the coating liquid is cured, whereby the glass plate 90 is coated. A resin layer 91 was formed. Next, as shown in FIG. 36 (c), printing patterns 92a to 92f are provided on the resin layer 91 by printing a plurality of types of ink set to have different surface tensions on the resin layer 91. . Here, the printing patterns 92a to 92f are respectively constituted by ink having a surface tension of 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, and 42 mN / m. As a means for printing such an ink on the resin layer 91, a set of # 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, 42 of “JUMBO SURFACE TENSION TEST PENS” manufactured by Corona Supplies Ltd. was used. The number after # represents the surface tension (unit: mN / m) of the ink contained in the pen.
　その後、１時間が経過するのを待ってから、印刷パターン９２ａ～９２ｆの状態を観察した。図３６（ｄ）に、一時間経過後の印刷パターン９２ａ～９２ｆの状態の一例を示す。なお一般に、表面張力が高い方が、インキが下地（ここでは樹脂層９１）からはじかれ、この結果、印刷パターンが乱れやすい。すなわち図３６に示す印刷パターン９２ａ～９２ｆにおいては、右側に位置するパターン、すなわち印刷パターン９２ｆ側のパターンほど、樹脂層９１からはじかれて乱れやすくなっている。従って、樹脂層９１の印刷適性が不十分な場合、印刷パターン９２ａ～９２ｆのうちのいずれか１つを境界として、それよりも左側のパターンには乱れが生じず、それよりも右側のパターンには乱れが生じることになる。図３６（ｄ）に示す例は、樹脂層９１が、印刷パターン９２ａ～９２ｄ（表面張力が３２～３８ｍＮ／ｍのパターン）に対しては印刷適性を有するが、印刷パターン９２ｅ，９２ｆ（表面張力が４０，４２ｍＮ／ｍのパターン）に対しては印刷適性を有さないことを意味している。このような試験を実施することにより、３２，３４，３６，３８，４０，４２ｍＮ／ｍの表面張力を有するインキに対する、上述の３種類の樹脂の印刷適性をそれぞれ評価することができる。 After that, after waiting for 1 hour, the state of the print patterns 92a to 92f was observed. FIG. 36D shows an example of the state of the print patterns 92a to 92f after one hour has elapsed. In general, when the surface tension is higher, the ink is repelled from the base (here, the resin layer 91), and as a result, the printing pattern is likely to be disturbed. That is, in the print patterns 92a to 92f shown in FIG. 36, the pattern located on the right side, that is, the pattern on the print pattern 92f side, is easily repelled from the resin layer 91 and disturbed. Accordingly, when the printability of the resin layer 91 is insufficient, the pattern on the left side is not disturbed with any one of the print patterns 92a to 92f as a boundary, and the pattern on the right side is not changed. Will be disturbed. In the example shown in FIG. 36 (d), the resin layer 91 has printability for the print patterns 92a to 92d (pattern with a surface tension of 32 to 38 mN / m), but the print patterns 92e and 92f (surface tension) Is 40, 42 mN / m pattern). By performing such a test, it is possible to evaluate the printability of the above-described three types of resins for inks having surface tensions of 32, 34, 36, 38, 40, and 42 mN / m.
　印刷適性の評価結果を表１に示す。表１において、「○」は、インキからなる印刷パターンの乱れ（インキのはじき）が生じなかったことを意味し、「×」は、インキのはじきが生じたことを意味している。表１に示すように、アクリル系樹脂およびポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂から構成された樹脂層９１は、３２～４２ｍＮ／ｍの表面張力を有するインキに対する印刷適性を有していた。一方、エポキシ系樹脂から構成された樹脂層９１は、３２ｍＮ／ｍの表面張力を有するインキに対する印刷適性は有していたが、３４～４２ｍＮ／ｍの表面張力を有するインキに対する印刷適性は有していなかった。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000001
 Table 1 shows the evaluation results of printability. In Table 1, “◯” means that the printing pattern made of ink was not disturbed (ink repelling), and “x” means that ink repelling occurred. As shown in Table 1, the resin layer 91 composed of an acrylic resin and a polyene-polythiol resin had printability for ink having a surface tension of 32 to 42 mN / m. On the other hand, the resin layer 91 made of an epoxy resin has printability for ink having a surface tension of 32 mN / m, but has printability for ink having a surface tension of 34 to 42 mN / m. It wasn't.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000001
　上述のように、ポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂は、その上に塗布されるインキなどの塗布液の表面張力が大きい場合であっても、塗布液がはじかれてパターンが乱れてしまうことを抑制することができる。従って、補強部２６の第１面２６ａ上に第２加飾部６２などの構成要素が設けられる場合、ポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂を用いて補強部２６を構成することが好ましいと言える。 As described above, the polyene-polythiol-based resin prevents the pattern from being disturbed by repelling the coating liquid even when the surface tension of the coating liquid such as ink applied thereon is large. Can do. Therefore, when a component such as the second decorative portion 62 is provided on the first surface 26a of the reinforcing portion 26, it can be said that the reinforcing portion 26 is preferably configured using a polyene-polythiol resin.
　追加の評価として、スクリーン印刷法によってエポキシ系樹脂からなる層の上にインキを印刷したところ、エポキシ系樹脂によってインキがはじかれることに起因する印刷不良が確認された。インキとしては、セイコーアドバンス社製の１６９０Ｎを用いた。 As an additional evaluation, when ink was printed on a layer made of an epoxy resin by a screen printing method, a printing defect due to the ink being repelled by the epoxy resin was confirmed. As the ink, 1690N manufactured by Seiko Advance was used.
　（実施例３）
　エポキシ系樹脂およびポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂の耐衝撃性を評価した。具体的には、はじめに、実施例１の場合と同様にして、エポキシ系樹脂およびポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂から構成された補強部２６を備えたカバーガラス２０をそれぞれ作製した。また比較のため、補強部２６を備えないカバーガラス２０を作製した。次に図３７に示すように、打撃手段９４を用いてカバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃに衝撃を加えた。なお補強部２６が設けられている場合、カバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃは、補強部２６の側面２６ｃによって構成されている。 Example 3
The impact resistance of epoxy resins and polyene-polythiol resins was evaluated. Specifically, first, in the same manner as in Example 1, cover glasses 20 each having a reinforcing portion 26 made of an epoxy resin and a polyene-polythiol resin were produced. For comparison, a cover glass 20 without the reinforcing portion 26 was produced. Next, as shown in FIG. 37, impact was applied to the side surface 20 c of the cover glass 20 using the striking means 94. When the reinforcing portion 26 is provided, the side surface 20 c of the cover glass 20 is configured by the side surface 26 c of the reinforcing portion 26.
　打撃手段９４としては、長さが３５ｃｍのステンレス鋼（ＳＵＳ）製の、所定の直径を有する丸棒を用いた。ここでは、直径が０．５０，０，７５，１．００，１．２５ｃｍのＳＵＳ製の丸棒をそれぞれ用いて試験を行った。以下、具体的な試験方法について説明する。 As the hitting means 94, a round bar made of stainless steel (SUS) having a length of 35 cm and having a predetermined diameter was used. Here, tests were performed using SUS round bars having diameters of 0.50, 0, 75, 1.00, and 1.25 cm, respectively. Hereinafter, a specific test method will be described.
　はじめに、載置台９７の上に、カバーガラス２０と、支持手段９５によって支持された打撃手段９４と、を載置する。カバーガラス２０は、側面２０ｃが上方を向くように載置される。支持手段９５は、打撃手段９４の一端９４ａが真上を向く状態から真横を向く状態になるまで打撃手段９４が他端９４ｂを軸として９０°にわたって回転し、これによって打撃手段９４の一端９４ａがカバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃに衝突するように、打撃手段９４の他端９４ｂを支持する。この場合、打撃手段９４の長さおよび直径によって定まる衝突エネルギーをカバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃに正確に加えることができる。なおカバーガラス２０の周囲には、カバーガラス２０の第１面２０ａや第２面２０ｂを保持し、カバーガラス２０に衝撃が加えられた際にカバーガラス２０が倒れてしまうことを防ぐための保持手段９６が設けられていてもよい。 First, the cover glass 20 and the striking means 94 supported by the supporting means 95 are placed on the placing table 97. The cover glass 20 is placed so that the side surface 20c faces upward. The support means 95 rotates the striking means 94 over 90 ° about the other end 94b until the one end 94a of the striking means 94 changes from a state in which the one end 94a faces directly upward to a state in which the one end 94a of the striking means 94 is rotated. The other end 94b of the striking means 94 is supported so as to collide with the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20. In this case, collision energy determined by the length and diameter of the striking means 94 can be accurately applied to the side surface 20 c of the cover glass 20. In addition, the 1st surface 20a and the 2nd surface 20b of the cover glass 20 are hold | maintained in the circumference | surroundings of the cover glass 20, and it hold | maintains to prevent that the cover glass 20 falls down when an impact is applied to the cover glass 20 Means 96 may be provided.
　打撃手段９４を用いてカバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃに衝撃を加えた後、４点曲げ試験を実施してカバーガラス２０の曲げ強度を測定した。 After impact was applied to the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 using the striking means 94, a four-point bending test was performed to measure the bending strength of the cover glass 20.
　耐衝撃性の評価結果を表２に示す。表２において、「○」は、測定された曲げ強度が５００ＭＰａ以上であったことを意味し、「×」は、測定された曲げ強度が５００ＭＰａ未満であったことを意味している。表２に示すように、ポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂から構成された補強部２６を備えたカバーガラス２０においては、直径が１．００ｃｍの打撃手段９４を用いてカバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃに衝撃を加えた後であっても、十分な曲げ強度を維持することができていた。一方、エポキシ系樹脂から構成された補強部２６を備えたカバーガラス２０においては、１．００ｃｍの打撃手段９４を用いてカバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃに衝撃を加えた後には、十分な曲げ強度を維持することができなかった。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000002
 The evaluation results of impact resistance are shown in Table 2. In Table 2, “◯” means that the measured bending strength was 500 MPa or more, and “x” means that the measured bending strength was less than 500 MPa. As shown in Table 2, in the cover glass 20 provided with the reinforcing portion 26 made of polyene-polythiol resin, impact was applied to the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 using the striking means 94 having a diameter of 1.00 cm. Even after the test, sufficient bending strength could be maintained. On the other hand, in the cover glass 20 provided with the reinforcing portion 26 made of epoxy resin, a sufficient bending strength is obtained after impact is applied to the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 using the hitting means 94 of 1.00 cm. Could not be maintained.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000002
　上述のように、エポキシ系樹脂の硬度は、カバーガラス２０の補強部２６を構成するための材料の硬度としては過剰に高く、従って脆い。このため、打撃手段９４を用いてカバーガラス２０の側面２０ｃに衝撃が加えられたとき、補強部２６が少なくとも部分的に破壊され、この結果、カバーガラス２０の十分な曲げ強度を維持することができなかったと考えられる。これに対して、ポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂の硬度は適切な範囲内となっており、例えば上述のようにＤ５０～Ｄ７５の範囲内になっている。このため、ポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂から構成された補強部２６は、打撃手段９４から加えられる衝撃を、弾性変形することによって吸収することができる。このため、衝撃が加えられた後であっても、カバーガラス２０の十分な曲げ強度を維持することができたと考えられる。 As described above, the hardness of the epoxy resin is excessively high as the hardness of the material for constituting the reinforcing portion 26 of the cover glass 20 and is therefore brittle. For this reason, when an impact is applied to the side surface 20c of the cover glass 20 using the striking means 94, the reinforcing portion 26 is at least partially broken, and as a result, sufficient bending strength of the cover glass 20 can be maintained. It is thought that it was not possible. In contrast, the hardness of the polyene-polythiol resin is within an appropriate range, for example, within the range of D50 to D75 as described above. For this reason, the reinforcing portion 26 made of the polyene-polythiol resin can absorb the impact applied from the striking means 94 by elastic deformation. For this reason, it is thought that sufficient bending strength of the cover glass 20 could be maintained even after the impact was applied.
　（実施例４）
　実施例１で用いた上述の３種類の樹脂の耐湿性を評価した。具体的には、はじめに、実施例１の場合と同様にして、上述の３種類の樹脂から構成された補強部２６を備えたカバーガラス２０をそれぞれ作製した。次に、各カバーガラス２０を、温度８５℃および相対湿度８５％の高温高湿環境下に２４０時間置いた。その後、各カバーガラス２０の外観に変色などの変化が生じてないかどうかを、目視によって評価した。また、補強部２６が単位基材２２の側面２２ｃに十分に密着しているかどうかを、補強部２６を手で持つことにより、または補強部２６に対して上述の実施例４で用いた打撃手段９４を用いて衝撃を加えることにより、評価した。結果、３種類の樹脂から構成された補強部２６を備えたカバーガラス２０のいずれに関しても、補強部２６の外観および補強部２６の密着性が十分に維持されていることを確認した。 Example 4
The above three types of resins used in Example 1 were evaluated for moisture resistance. Specifically, first, in the same manner as in Example 1, the cover glasses 20 each including the reinforcing portion 26 made of the above-described three types of resins were produced. Next, each cover glass 20 was placed in a high temperature and high humidity environment at a temperature of 85 ° C. and a relative humidity of 85% for 240 hours. Thereafter, whether or not a change such as discoloration occurred in the appearance of each cover glass 20 was visually evaluated. Further, whether or not the reinforcing portion 26 is sufficiently in close contact with the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 can be determined by holding the reinforcing portion 26 by hand, or the striking means used in the above-described fourth embodiment with respect to the reinforcing portion 26. Evaluation was performed by applying an impact using 94. As a result, it was confirmed that the appearance of the reinforcing portion 26 and the adhesion of the reinforcing portion 26 were sufficiently maintained for any of the cover glasses 20 provided with the reinforcing portion 26 made of three types of resins.
　（実施例５）
　実施例１で用いた上述の３種類の樹脂の耐光性を評価した。具体的には、はじめに、実施例１の場合と同様にして、上述の３種類の樹脂から構成された補強部２６を備えたカバーガラス２０をそれぞれ作製した。次に、Ａｔｌａｓ　Ｍａｔｅｒｉａｌ　Ｔｅｓｔｉｎｇ　Ｔｅｃｈｎｏｌｏｇｙ社製のＳＵＮＴＥＳＴ　ＣＰＳ＋を用いて、各カバーガラス２０に光を照射した。その後、各カバーガラス２０の外観に変色などの変化が生じてないかどうかを、目視によって評価した。また、補強部２６が単位基材２２の側面２２ｃに十分に密着しているかどうかを、補強部２６を手で持つことにより、または補強部２６に対して上述の実施例４で用いた打撃手段９４を用いて衝撃を加えることにより、評価した。結果、３種類の樹脂から構成された補強部２６を備えたカバーガラス２０のいずれに関しても、補強部２６の外観および補強部２６の密着性が十分に維持されていることを確認した。 (Example 5)
The light resistance of the above-mentioned three types of resins used in Example 1 was evaluated. Specifically, first, in the same manner as in Example 1, the cover glasses 20 each including the reinforcing portion 26 made of the above-described three types of resins were produced. Next, each cover glass 20 was irradiated with light using SUNTEST CPS + manufactured by Atlas Material Testing Technology. Thereafter, whether or not a change such as discoloration occurred in the appearance of each cover glass 20 was visually evaluated. Further, whether or not the reinforcing portion 26 is sufficiently in close contact with the side surface 22c of the unit base member 22 can be determined by holding the reinforcing portion 26 by hand, or the striking means used in the above-described fourth embodiment with respect to the reinforcing portion 26. Evaluation was performed by applying an impact using 94. As a result, it was confirmed that the appearance of the reinforcing portion 26 and the adhesion of the reinforcing portion 26 were sufficiently maintained for any of the cover glasses 20 provided with the reinforcing portion 26 made of three types of resins.
　１０　カバーガラス付き表示装置
　１５　表示装置
　２０　カバーガラス
　２２　単位基材
　２３　カバーガラスの貫通孔
　２３ｃ　壁面
　２４ａ　圧縮応力層
　２４ｂ　引張応力層
　２５　単位基材の貫通孔
　２５ｃ　壁面
　２６　補強部（側面用補強部）
　２７　塗布液
　２８　孔用補強部
　３０　基材
　４０　タッチパネルセンサ部
　６０　第１加飾部
　６２　第２加飾部
　８１　第１保護膜
　８２　第２保護膜 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 Display apparatus with cover glass 15 Display apparatus 20 Cover glass 22 Unit base material 23 Cover glass through-hole 23c Wall surface 24a Compressive stress layer 24b Tensile stress layer 25 Unit base material through-hole 25c Wall surface 26 Reinforcement part (side reinforcement part)
27 Coating liquid 28 Hole reinforcing part 30 Base material 40 Touch panel sensor part 60 First decorative part 62 Second decorative part 81 First protective film 82 Second protective film

Claims (29)

  1. 　表示装置に設けられるカバーガラスであって、
    　第１面、前記第１面と反対側の第２面、および前記第１面と前記第２面との間に広がる側面を含み、ガラスからなる単位基材と、
    　前記単位基材の側面上に設けられ、樹脂材料を含む補強部と、を備え、
    　前記補強部の前記樹脂材料が、エン化合物およびチオール化合物を含むポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂を有している、カバーガラス。     A cover glass provided in the display device,
    A first substrate, a second substrate opposite to the first surface, and a side surface extending between the first surface and the second surface, and a unit substrate made of glass;
    Provided on a side surface of the unit base material, and a reinforcing portion including a resin material,
    The cover glass, wherein the resin material of the reinforcing portion includes a polyene-polythiol resin containing an ene compound and a thiol compound.
  2. 　前記補強部は、前記単位基材の外形を構成する側面上に設けられ、前記樹脂材料を含む側面用補強部を有する、請求項１に記載のカバーガラス。 2. The cover glass according to claim 1, wherein the reinforcing portion is provided on a side surface constituting an outer shape of the unit base material and has a side reinforcing portion including the resin material.
  3. 　前記単位基材には、前記第１面および前記第２面を貫通する貫通孔が形成されており、
    　前記補強部は、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔上に設けられ、前記樹脂材料を含む孔用補強部を有する、請求項１または２に記載のカバーガラス。     In the unit base material, a through-hole penetrating the first surface and the second surface is formed,
    The cover glass according to claim 1, wherein the reinforcing portion is provided on the through hole of the unit base material and has a hole reinforcing portion including the resin material.
  4. 　前記補強部の表面上に、少なくとも部分的に、所定の色を呈する加飾部が設けられている、請求項１乃至３のいずれか一項に記載のカバーガラス。 The cover glass according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein a decorative portion exhibiting a predetermined color is provided at least partially on a surface of the reinforcing portion.
  5. 　前記補強部の前記樹脂材料のポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂は、２０～８０重量％のエン化合物と、２０～８０重量％のチオール化合物とを含む、請求項１乃至４のいずれか一項に記載のカバーガラス。 The polyene-polythiol-based resin of the resin material of the reinforcing portion includes 20 to 80% by weight of an ene compound and 20 to 80% by weight of a thiol compound according to any one of claims 1 to 4. cover glass.
  6. 　表示装置に設けられるカバーガラスであって、
    　第１面、および前記第１面と反対側の第２面を含み、かつ前記第１面および前記第２面を貫通する貫通孔が形成されたガラスからなる単位基材と、
    　前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の壁面上に設けられ、樹脂材料を含む孔用補強部と、を備える、カバーガラス。     A cover glass provided in the display device,
    A unit substrate made of glass, which includes a first surface and a second surface opposite to the first surface, and in which a through-hole penetrating the first surface and the second surface is formed;
    A cover glass provided on a wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material and including a hole reinforcing portion including a resin material.
  7. 　前記孔用補強部は、前記単位基材の前記第１面の端部から側方へ延びる第１面、前記単位基材の前記第２面の端部から側方へ延びる第２面、および、前記孔用補強部の前記第１面と前記第２面との間に広がる側面を含み、
    　前記単位基材の前記第１面と前記孔用補強部の前記第１面との間の段差は１０μｍ以下であり、
    　前記単位基材の前記第２面と前記孔用補強部の前記第２面との間の段差は１０μｍ以下である、請求項６に記載のカバーガラス。     The hole reinforcing portion includes a first surface extending laterally from an end portion of the first surface of the unit base material, a second surface extending laterally from an end portion of the second surface of the unit base material, and A side surface extending between the first surface and the second surface of the hole reinforcing portion,
    The step between the first surface of the unit substrate and the first surface of the hole reinforcing portion is 10 μm or less,
    The cover glass of Claim 6 whose level | step difference between the said 2nd surface of the said unit base material and the said 2nd surface of the said reinforcement part for holes is 10 micrometers or less.
  8. 　前記単位基材は、少なくとも前記第１面および前記第２面に形成された圧縮応力層と、前記第１面側の前記圧縮応力層と前記第２面側の前記圧縮応力層との間に位置する引張応力層と、を含む、請求項６または７に記載のカバーガラス。 The unit base material includes at least a compressive stress layer formed on the first surface and the second surface, and the compressive stress layer on the first surface side and the compressive stress layer on the second surface side. The cover glass according to claim 6, comprising a tensile stress layer located.
  9. 　前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の前記壁面に前記引張応力層が露出しており、
    　前記孔用補強部は、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の前記壁面に露出している前記引張応力層が前記孔用補強部によって覆われるよう、形成される、請求項８に記載のカバーガラス。     The tensile stress layer is exposed on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material,
    The cover glass according to claim 8, wherein the hole reinforcing portion is formed such that the tensile stress layer exposed on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material is covered with the hole reinforcing portion. .
  10. 　前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の前記壁面上に設けられた前記孔用補強部の被覆寸法の最小値が、２０μｍ以上である、請求項６乃至９のいずれか一項に記載のカバーガラス。 The cover glass according to any one of claims 6 to 9, wherein a minimum value of a covering dimension of the reinforcing portion for holes provided on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material is 20 µm or more.
  11. 　前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の前記壁面は、前記単位基材の前記第１面に交わるとともに、前記単位基材の前記第２面側へ向かうにつれて前記貫通孔の中心側へ広がる第１壁面と、前記単位基材の前記第２面に交わるとともに、前記単位基材の前記第１面側へ向かうにつれて前記貫通孔の中心側へ広がり、そして前記第１壁面に合流する第２壁面と、を含む、請求項６乃至１０のいずれか一項に記載のカバーガラス。 The wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material intersects with the first surface of the unit base material and spreads toward the center side of the through hole toward the second surface side of the unit base material. And a second wall surface that intersects the second surface of the unit base material, extends toward the center of the through hole toward the first surface side of the unit base material, and merges with the first wall surface; The cover glass as described in any one of Claims 6 thru | or 10 containing these.
  12. 　前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の前記壁面は、前記単位基材の前記第２面側から前記第１面側へ向かうにつれて前記貫通孔の中心側へ広がっている、請求項６乃至１０のいずれか一項に記載のカバーガラス。 The said wall surface of the said through-hole of the said unit base material spreads to the center side of the said through-hole as it goes to the said 1st surface side from the said 2nd surface side of the said unit base material. The cover glass according to claim 1.
  13. 　前記単位基材の前記第１面側には、所定の色を呈する加飾部が設けられており、
    　前記孔用補強部は、前記加飾部と同色を呈するよう構成されている、請求項６乃至１２のいずれか一項に記載のカバーガラス。     The first surface side of the unit base material is provided with a decorative portion exhibiting a predetermined color,
    The cover glass according to any one of claims 6 to 12, wherein the hole reinforcing portion is configured to exhibit the same color as the decorative portion.
  14. 　前記加飾部は、前記カバーガラスの法線方向に沿って見た場合に前記孔用補強部と重なるよう構成されている、請求項１３に記載のカバーガラス。 The cover glass according to claim 13, wherein the decoration portion is configured to overlap the hole reinforcing portion when viewed along the normal direction of the cover glass.
  15. 　前記孔用補強部は、所定の色を呈するよう構成されている、請求項６乃至１２のいずれか一項に記載のカバーガラス。 The cover glass according to any one of claims 6 to 12, wherein the hole reinforcing portion is configured to exhibit a predetermined color.
  16. 　前記単位基材の前記第１面側に、タッチパネルセンサ部の少なくとも一部が設けられている、請求項６乃至１５のいずれか一項に記載のカバーガラス。 The cover glass according to any one of claims 6 to 15, wherein at least a part of a touch panel sensor portion is provided on the first surface side of the unit base material.
  17. 　前記孔用補強部の前記樹脂材料が、ポリエン－ポリチオール系樹脂を含んでいる、請求項６乃至１６のいずれか一項に記載のカバーガラス。 The cover glass according to any one of claims 6 to 16, wherein the resin material of the hole reinforcing portion includes a polyene-polythiol resin.
  18. 　前記孔用補強部の前記側面のうち前記孔用補強部の前記第１面と交わる部分または前記第２面と交わる部分の少なくとも一方が、丸面または角面に加工されている、請求項７、または、請求項７を引用する請求項８乃至１７のいずれか一項に記載のカバーガラス。 The at least one of the part which cross | intersects the said 1st surface of the said reinforcing part for holes among the said side surfaces of the said reinforcing part for holes, or the part which crosses the said 2nd surface is processed into the round surface or the square surface. Or the cover glass as described in any one of Claims 8 thru | or 17 which quotes Claim 7.
  19. 　表示装置と、
    　前記表示装置に配置されたカバーガラスと、を備え、
    　前記カバーガラスが、請求項１乃至１８のいずれか一項に記載のカバーガラスからなる、カバーガラス付き表示装置。     A display device;
    A cover glass disposed on the display device,
    A display device with a cover glass, wherein the cover glass is made of the cover glass according to any one of claims 1 to 18.
  20. 　表示装置に設けられる、貫通孔が形成されたカバーガラスの製造方法であって、
    　第１面、および前記第１面と反対側の第２面を含み、かつ第１面および前記第２面を貫通する貫通孔が形成されたガラスからなる単位基材、を準備する工程と、
    　前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の壁面に、樹脂材料を含む塗布液を塗布する塗布工程と、
    　前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の壁面上の塗布液を硬化させ、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の壁面上に孔用補強部を形成する硬化工程と、を備える、カバーガラスの製造方法。     A method of manufacturing a cover glass provided with a through-hole provided in a display device,
    Preparing a unit base material made of glass including a first surface and a second surface opposite to the first surface and having a through-hole penetrating the first surface and the second surface;
    An application step of applying an application liquid containing a resin material to the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material;
    Curing a coating solution on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material to form a hole reinforcing portion on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material.
  21. 　前記単位基材は、少なくとも前記第１面および前記第２面に形成された圧縮応力層と、前記第１面側の前記圧縮応力層と前記第２面側の前記圧縮応力層との間に位置する引張応力層と、を含む、請求項２０に記載のカバーガラスの製造方法。 The unit base material includes at least a compressive stress layer formed on the first surface and the second surface, and the compressive stress layer on the first surface side and the compressive stress layer on the second surface side. The manufacturing method of the cover glass of Claim 20 including the tensile stress layer located.
  22. 　前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の前記壁面に前記引張応力層が露出しており、
    　前記孔用補強部は、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の前記壁面に露出している前記引張応力層が前記孔用補強部によって覆われるよう、形成される、請求項２１に記載のカバーガラスの製造方法。     The tensile stress layer is exposed on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material,
    The cover glass according to claim 21, wherein the hole reinforcing portion is formed such that the tensile stress layer exposed on the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material is covered with the hole reinforcing portion. Manufacturing method.
  23. 　前記塗布工程において、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔は、前記単位基材の前記第２面側で封止されており、かつ前記塗布液は、封止された空間内に前記単位基材の前記第１面側から塗布され、
    　前記硬化工程において、前記孔用補強部は、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔を塞ぐように形成され、
    　前記カバーガラスの製造方法は、前記硬化工程の後、前記孔用補強部に貫通孔を形成する樹脂材料加工工程をさらに備える、請求項２０乃至２２のいずれか一項に記載のカバーガラスの製造方法。     In the coating step, the through hole of the unit base material is sealed on the second surface side of the unit base material, and the coating liquid is formed in the unit base material in the sealed space. Applied from the first surface side,
    In the curing step, the hole reinforcing portion is formed so as to close the through hole of the unit base material,
    The manufacturing method of the cover glass according to any one of claims 20 to 22, further comprising a resin material processing step of forming a through hole in the hole reinforcing portion after the curing step. Method.
  24. 　前記準備工程において、前記単位基材の前記第１面上には、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔に連通する孔が形成された第１保護膜が設けられており、
    　前記第１保護膜の前記孔の壁面は、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の前記壁面よりも、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔の中心側に位置している、請求項２３に記載のカバーガラスの製造方法。     In the preparation step, on the first surface of the unit base material, a first protective film in which a hole communicating with the through hole of the unit base material is formed is provided,
    24. The cover according to claim 23, wherein a wall surface of the hole of the first protective film is located closer to a center side of the through hole of the unit base material than the wall surface of the through hole of the unit base material. Glass manufacturing method.
  25. 　前記準備工程は、
    　前記孔が形成された前記第１保護膜を前記単位基材の前記第１面上に設ける保護膜形成工程と、
    　前記第１保護膜をレジストとして前記単位基材をウェットエッチングすることによって前記貫通孔を形成するエッチング工程と、を含む、請求項２４に記載のカバーガラスの製造方法。     The preparation step includes
    A protective film forming step of providing the first protective film with the holes formed on the first surface of the unit base;
    The manufacturing method of the cover glass of Claim 24 including the etching process of forming the said through-hole by carrying out the wet etching of the said unit base material using the said 1st protective film as a resist.
  26. 　前記保護膜形成工程において、前記第１保護膜の前記孔に対応する位置に孔が形成された第２保護膜が前記単位基材の前記第２面上にさらに設けられ、
    　前記エッチング工程において、前記単位基材は、前記第１保護膜および前記第２保護膜をレジストとして、前記第１面側および前記第２面側からウェットエッチングされ、
    　前記塗布工程において、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔は、前記第２保護膜上に配置された封止部材によって封止されている、請求項２５に記載のカバーガラスの製造方法。     In the protective film forming step, a second protective film having a hole formed at a position corresponding to the hole of the first protective film is further provided on the second surface of the unit base material,
    In the etching step, the unit base material is wet-etched from the first surface side and the second surface side using the first protective film and the second protective film as a resist,
    26. The cover glass manufacturing method according to claim 25, wherein, in the coating step, the through hole of the unit base material is sealed by a sealing member disposed on the second protective film.
  27. 　前記準備工程において、前記単位基材の前記第２面上には、前記単位基材の前記貫通孔を封止する第２保護膜または封止部材が設けられており、
    　前記エッチング工程において、前記単位基材は、前記第１保護膜をレジストとして前記第１面側からウェットエッチングされる、請求項２５に記載のカバーガラスの製造方法。     In the preparation step, a second protective film or a sealing member for sealing the through hole of the unit base material is provided on the second surface of the unit base material,
    26. The method for manufacturing a cover glass according to claim 25, wherein, in the etching step, the unit base material is wet-etched from the first surface side using the first protective film as a resist.
  28. 　前記単位基材の前記第１面側に、加飾部またはタッチパネルセンサ部の少なくともいずれかを含む要素部の少なくとも一部を形成する要素部形成工程をさらに備える、請求項２５乃至２７のいずれか一項に記載のカバーガラスの製造方法。 The element part formation process which further comprises the element part formation process which forms at least one part of the element part containing at least any one of a decorating part or a touchscreen sensor part in the said 1st surface side of the said unit base material. The method for producing a cover glass according to one item.
  29. 　前記要素部形成工程は、前記保護膜形成工程に先行して実施される、請求項２８に記載のカバーガラスの製造方法。 29. The cover glass manufacturing method according to claim 28, wherein the element part forming step is performed prior to the protective film forming step.
PCT/JP2015/053814 2014-02-12 2015-02-12 Cover glass, display device having cover glass, and method for producing cover glass WO2015122454A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2014024782A JP6260322B2 (en) 2014-02-12 2014-02-12 Cover glass manufacturing method, cover glass, and display device with cover glass
JP2014-024782 2014-02-12
JP2014-069994 2014-03-28
JP2014069994A JP6331127B2 (en) 2014-03-28 2014-03-28 Cover glass and display device with cover glass

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2015122454A1 true WO2015122454A1 (en) 2015-08-20

Family

ID=53800195

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2015/053814 WO2015122454A1 (en) 2014-02-12 2015-02-12 Cover glass, display device having cover glass, and method for producing cover glass

Country Status (2)

Country Link
TW (1) TWI647098B (en)
WO (1) WO2015122454A1 (en)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2009167086A (en) * 2007-12-18 2009-07-30 Hoya Corp Cover glass for portable terminal, its manufacturing method, and portable terminal apparatus
WO2013154034A1 (en) * 2012-04-10 2013-10-17 旭硝子株式会社 Reinforced glass article and touch sensor integrated-type cover glass
JP5622133B1 (en) * 2013-10-25 2014-11-12 大日本印刷株式会社 Manufacturing method of cover glass

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2009167086A (en) * 2007-12-18 2009-07-30 Hoya Corp Cover glass for portable terminal, its manufacturing method, and portable terminal apparatus
WO2013154034A1 (en) * 2012-04-10 2013-10-17 旭硝子株式会社 Reinforced glass article and touch sensor integrated-type cover glass
JP5622133B1 (en) * 2013-10-25 2014-11-12 大日本印刷株式会社 Manufacturing method of cover glass

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TWI647098B (en) 2019-01-11
TW201536541A (en) 2015-10-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6369047B2 (en) Cover glass and display device with cover glass
JP5863260B2 (en) Display device and manufacturing method thereof
TWI604949B (en) Touch sensitive display
WO2014123165A1 (en) Transparent surface material and display device using same
WO2013057850A1 (en) Decorative film for display device, method for producing same, protective panel for display device, and method for producing same
KR20140010765A (en) Touch screen panel protection sheet and manufacturing method thereof
JP6390087B2 (en) Display device and manufacturing method thereof
JP6331127B2 (en) Cover glass and display device with cover glass
KR101164632B1 (en) Protection sheet for display of portable electronic device
KR101461611B1 (en) window for protecting a panel, a portable terminal including the same and a manufacturing method of the same
JP2015068909A (en) Method of manufacturing cover glass for electronic apparatus
JP6488904B2 (en) Cover glass, display device with cover glass, and method of manufacturing cover glass
CN109795190A (en) Optical component and have the production method of product of touch sensor, optical component
JP6460467B2 (en) Cover glass and display device with cover glass
JP6260322B2 (en) Cover glass manufacturing method, cover glass, and display device with cover glass
WO2015122454A1 (en) Cover glass, display device having cover glass, and method for producing cover glass
JP6309729B2 (en) Manufacturing method of cover glass for electronic equipment
JP6183706B2 (en) Cover glass and display device with cover glass
JP2012230304A (en) Method for manufacturing protective sheet for liquid crystal display, protective sheet for liquid crystal display, method for manufacturing liquid crystal display device and liquid crystal display device
JP2016103071A (en) Position coordinate detection substrate and display device
JP2014219437A (en) Display device
JP6376462B2 (en) Cover glass manufacturing method and display device with cover glass
JP2010181619A (en) Display device and electronic equipment
JP6218027B2 (en) Touch panel sensor module and method of manufacturing touch panel sensor module
JP6201601B2 (en) Touch panel sensor, touch panel sensor member, and touch panel sensor manufacturing method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 15748633

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 15748633

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1